Home

Operators Manual

image

Contents

1. 2229 Invalid Cal Constant Name 2230 Remote Serial Port Dead 2231 IEEE488 2 Query After Indef Response 2232 OPER Not Allowed While Fault Pending 2300 Level Faults Report Generation 2300 Unknown Report Requested 2301 Unknown Report Device Requested 2302 Serial Port Timeout 2303 Could not find USB drive 2304 Could not open report file on USB drive 2400 Level Faults Real Time Clock 2400 Could not read time and date 2401 Could not set time and date 2500 Level Faults Self Calibration 2500 Invalid Cal Procedure Number 2501 Could not Ext Cal Gain 2502 Could not Ext Cal Ref 2503 Could not Ext Cal Neg 2504 Could not Cal Ratio 2505 Could not Cal Pos 11 V or 22 V DC Zero 2506 Could not Cal Neg 11 V or 22 V DC Zero 2507 Could not Cal Pos 11 V or 22 V DC Gain 2508 Could not Cal 6 5 V or 13 V Buf Ref 2509 Could not Cal 2 2 V Zero 2510 Could not Cal 220 mV Gain S1 2511 Could not Cal 220 mV Gain S2 2512 Could not Cal 220 mV Gain S3 2513 Could not Cal 220 mV Gain S4 2514 Could not Cal 220 V DC Offset 2515 Could not Cal 220 V DC Rnet 2516 Could not Cal 220 V DC Gain 2517 Could not Cal ACV Gain 2518 Flatness Cal Main Sensor Fail Appendices Fault Codes A 2519 Flatness Cal AC Cal Sensor Fail 2520 Could not Cal Fine Tune 14 bit DAC 2521 Coul
2. Calibrator hhp011 eps Figure 4 1 UUT Connections DC Voltage AC Voltage x10 kHz 4 9 5730A Operators Manual Triaxial Cable OPERATE STANDBY WIDEBAND 7V RMS MAX YY OPERATE STANDBY OUTPUT Triaxial Cable VERTU NOUS WIDEBAND 7V RMS MAX Note Keep the SENSE leads as short as possible Be careful not to exceed the capacitive load limit of 1000 pF up to 220 V 600 pF 220 V to 1100 V 1000 pF with 5725A Amplifier hhp012 eps Figure 4 2 UUT Connections AC Voltage gt 10 kHz 4 10 Front Panel Operation Connect the Calibrator to a UUT SENSE Figure 4 3 UUT Connections AC Current lt 2A Calibrator Front OPERATE STANDBY OUTPUT SENSE VAA A vn e e hhp013 eps 5730A Operators Manual 4 12 UUT Calibrator OPERATE STANDBY SENSE O4 WIRE Calibrator OPERATE STANDBY 2 Calibrator e Figure 4 4 UUT Connections Resistance hhp014 eps Front Panel Operation Connect the Calibrator to a UUT Calibrator OPERATE STANDBY Caution Use connections with exposed plug tips for the ohms function only Calibrator Calibrator OPERATE STANDBY
3. eeeeeee 4 5 V rms Accuracy 52120A Coil Accuracy 2l Input Current m Frequency gir cr of Amp turns of 52120A range of Amp turns of 52120A Range OAto 100A DC 0 to 2500 0 7 96 0 7 96 OAto 120A 10 Hz to 65 Hz 0 to 3000 0 7 96 0 7 96 OAto 120A 65 Hz to 300 Hz 0 to 3000 0 7 96 0 7 96 OAto 40A 300 Hz to 1 kHz 0 to 1000 0 7 96 0 7 96 OAto 12A 1 kHz to 3 kHz 0 to 300 0 8 96 1 0 96 OAto3A 3 kHz to 6 kHz 0 to 75 1 5 96 1 0 96 OAto1A 6 kHz to 10 kHz 0 to 25 5 0 1 0 Notes 1 The inductance and mutual inductance of the 25 turn coil and clamp that is measured causes a frequency dependent compliance voltage across the coil The length and configuration of the cables that connect the current to the coil also have an effect Maximum input current is 120 A input at approximately 100 Hz Maximum current input decreases to approximately 0 8 A at 10 kHz 2 Includes coil clamp interaction 52120A COIL 6 KA 50 Turn Coil Number of turns ssssssssee Minimum flexible probe length Maximum input current 120 A continuous with built in 12 V fan on Maximum voltage eee eee reece 4 5 V rms Accuracy 52120A Coil Accuracy I Input Current Frequency i c E of Amp turns of 52120A range of Amp turns 96 of 52120A Range OAto 100A DC 0 to 5000 0 7 96 0 7 96 OAto 120A 10 Hz to 65 Hz 0 to 6000 0 7 96 0 7 96 OAto 120A 65 Hz to 300 Hz 0
4. 1 12 742A Series Resistance Standards essere 1 12 Wideband AC Module Option 5700A 03 Calibration Support 1 12 The Components of the Calibrator eese 1 13 Yu lif into AH 1 13 Specification Confidence Levels eene 1 13 Use of Absolute and Relative Accuracy Specifications se 1 14 Use of Secondary Performance Specifications 1 14 General SpecificatiOlls siest oie Ease rtt Het e e ve reet Lp e HERR LIED 1 15 Electrical Specifications uite e ne nee pe EE e reed 1 17 DC Voltage Specifications sensie eeni eneee niiae EEan rennen 1 17 AC Voltage Specifications sitere erore baseet rodes eerte e terat dne beet ee dene 1 18 Resistance Specifications esses ener rennen 1 24 DC Current Specifications iterat etm ce t Re tede 1 27 AC Current Specifications eee ee eene entente then ttn nante nne 1 29 Wideband AC Voltage Option 5700 03 Specifications 1 32 52120A Specifications when Operated with the 57304A 1 33 52120A Electrical Performance Limits eene 1 33 Operated within 5730A Control Loop all current ranges 1 34 Coverage factor k 2 58 99 96 confidence level ssss 1 34 Coverage factor k 2 00 95 96 confidence level ssss 1 34 52120A COIL 3 KA 25 Turn
5. Calibrator hhp015 eps Figure 4 4 UUT Connections Resistance cont 5730A Operators Manual 50 Q Feedthrough Terminator supplied with the 5700A 03 option OPERATE STANDBY A E TAS ie e KOROJ WIDEBAND Cable supplied with the 5700A 03 option NOTE For wideband meters with higher than 50 Q input impedence use the 50 Q feedthrough terminator at the meter connection end For all wideband applications take care to achieve a good 50 Q impedence match use cable and connectors with a characteristic input impedence of 50 Q hhp016 eps Figure 4 5 UUT Wideband AC Voltage Output 5700A 03 Option UUT OPERATE STANDBY OUTPUT SENSE P y 19 ee air Layo WIDEBAND TVRNS MAX Nu w OOOCOCOCOCOCO hhp017 eps Figure 4 6 UUT Connections 5725A Amplified Current Output Front Panel Operation 4 Set the Output Set the Output While in normal output mode the display can be divided into four horizontal sections These sections are explained in Table 4 3 Table 4 3 Sections of the Display 12 21 12 10 52am 59 0 ppm 1 year 213 days since calibration Standby 10 00000 v 1 0000 kHz Section Explanation This section shows the date and time the uncertainty specification of the output and how long since the Calibrator was last calibrated This section shows the outpu
6. eeeeeeeeeeeeenren eene 7 11 Calibration Procedure 2 d eed pe REB eden 7 11 Range Adjustment eei tee etc tih i er a HEC perpe ERS 7 14 Calibrate the Wideband AC Module Option 5700A 03 sss 7 18 Wideband Flatness Calibration Procedure esee 7 19 Calibration Check eed PU qe esee 7 21 Develop a Performance History esses 7 21 Save Calibration Reports iiit Hee oe tet parasa 7 22 Contents continued Calibration Shift Results en ii het eee Ga eh eds 7 22 Calibration Check Shift Results 0 ccccccccccccccccceesessceececeeeessssececeeeeeeeensaaes 7 23 Raw Data Results ee hd e rh RR ee e LINH 7 23 8 Options and Accessories cesses 8 1 Introduction Ra ente teer HRSG RII 8 3 Wideband AC Voltage Module Option 5700A 03 sese 8 3 ACCeSSOTIGS coco trente d ERE pee tdi EE 8 3 Low Thermal EMF Test Leads ccccccccccccccecesssnsececececeeeesssnececeeeceeeensnaees 8 4 Rack Mount Kits noe arn ane ea ettet e reete bes tiere ed 8 4 Shielded IEEE 488 Interface Cables Y8021 and Y8022 8 4 DC Voltage Reference Standard 732B sse 8 4 1 Q and 10 KQ Resistance Standards 742A 1 and 742A 10k 8 5 3125 Amplifier ue e D pape ee Potes et oa 8 5 32120 Amplitiet ve 5 nere FRE HIS EEG Te EE ERR GERE eei 8 5 Appendices A Fatilt Codes ue ne fi i
7. 2 2 ipte ret tee ie E e t D ut tre 7 5 5730A Calibra on Er HERR iere ee OI ESSERE Erud 7 7 The Artifact Calibration Process 2 0 0 escesceseceseceeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeaecnaeeeseeees 7 7 Establish Traceability eiii acier mec Ie ceed aapi ea aaia 7 8 Calibration Reports 3 2 oit Re CE P ted bates cesaueynaveneeenlegenes 7 8 Range Adjustment 2 0 3 dedi eee GER do reete etta etus 7 8 Ib GAS retin x E 7 8 Run DC Zeros cain arat sine iene un Deed ioi edd 7 8 DC Zeros Reminder nire capt ed ee etc ento 7 9 Calibr tiOh yess 3 et tH ie RE Rei Pe othe ul CE estes eines ee dg 7 9 Calibration Security Passcode eseeeeeeeen ene e 7 10 Artifact Calibration tee cendres E aaa eaa Siaa 7 10 When to Adjust Calibrator Accuracy esee 7 11 Calibration Procedure sisses poetoe estae eo re a edo cedat 7 11 Range Adjustment ed ee Ee eid Mae eee he eset as da 7 14 Calibrate the Wideband AC Module Option 5700A 03 esses 7 18 Wideband Flatness Calibration Procedure serere 7 19 Calibration Check cele poste s D oe E ente epe 7 21 Develop a Performance History esses enn enne 7 21 save Calibration Reports iu eae Laide eae 7 22 Calibration Shift Results eese eene 7 22 Calibration Check Shift Results essere 7 23 Raw Data Results 2 20 4n eter te ote ves eee ette N eee deperit 7 23 5730A Operators Man
8. eese eene tenete tren 5 9 Configure the General Network Socket Port esee 5 9 Configure the LAN Default Gateway cessere rene nen 5 10 Set the LAN Subnet Mask et etes dp e t rete t tp ipe 5 10 Read the MAC Address eee ier eerie Re HERR ESSE 5 10 Establish an Ethernet Connection eese nennen 5 11 Terminate an Ethernet Connection eese ener 5 11 Use of Ethernet Remote Control essere 5 11 Use of USB 2 0 Remote Control sees ener eee 5 12 5730A Operators Manual 5 2 Remote Interface Setup Introduction Introduction The 5730A Calibrator can operate under remote control of an instrument controller computer or terminal as well as under direct local control from the front panel Remote control can be interactive with the user controlling each step from a terminal or can be set up to run automatically taking commands from a computer within an automated system This chapter explains how to connect configure and operate the Calibrator in remote mode The remote programmer uses a language of commands called device dependent commands to duplicate the functions of the front panel controls The Calibrator has four remote interfaces IEEE 488 RS 232 Serial 100 baseT Ethernet and USB 2 0 Only one interface may be used at a time The interface is selected in the Remote Setup menu as described below Note 5700
9. e Returns the Calibrator to the power up state 0 mV dc standby internal guard and internal sense e Clears the stored values for limits offset scale and error mode reference e Secures the Calibrator if the passcode had been entered Operate and Standby Modes When the OPERATE light above the output terminals is illuminated the output value and function shown on the display are active at the selected terminals Operate also shows on the display When the STANDBY light above the output terminals is lit all 5730A Calibrator binding posts except GROUND are open circuited Standby also appears on the display in this case Visual Connection Management output terminals illuminate in green to indicate which terminals are active and provide guidance to ensure the proper connection of cables for each function Push to put the Calibrator into the OPERATE state Push to put the Calibrator in the STANDBY state If any of the subsequent events occur during operation the Calibrator automatically switches to standby mode The Gy key is pushed A voltage 222 V is selected when the previous output voltage was 22 V The output location is changed for example by selecting an amplifier The exception is when the 5725A is selected for ac voltage or current provided the Calibrator current output location is set to 5725A The output function is changed from one function to another Front Panel Operation
10. Q Two Wire Comp Four Wire Four Wire I iL I 1L U IU lt I lt IMAX P SHORT 44 0 3 1 44 300 4 x10 1 9 44 160 1 5 x 10 10 44 30 1 6 x 10 19 44 16 3x 10 100 44 3 5 1x 10 190 44 2 5 1 9 x 10 1k 44 0 4 0 1 1 9k 44 0 4 0 19 10k 5000 50 2 0 19k 5000 50 3 8 100 k 7 5 2 x 10 190 k 4 0 3 8 x 10 1M 1 0 1 5 x 104 1 9M 0 53 2 9 x 10 10M 0 2 1x 10 19M 0 53 1 9 x 10 100 M 0 1 Notes 1 For I lt I L errors occur due to thermally generated voltages within the 5730A Use the following equation to determine the error and add this error to the corresponding accuracy or stability specification Error K I D I x I Where Error is in mQ for all two wire comp values and four wire short and in ppm for the remaining four wire values K is the constant from the above table and IL are expressed in mA for short to 1 9 KQ and IL are expressed in uA for 10 kO to 100 MQ 2 For Iu lt I lt Imax errors occur due to self heating of the resistors in the calibrator Use the following equation to determine the error in ppm and add this error to the corresponding accuracy or stability specification Error in ppm K 1 Where K is the constant from the above table I and Iy are expressed in mA for short to 19 KQ I and Iy are expressed in uA for 100 KQ to 100 MQ 1 26 Introduction and Specifications 1 Electrical Specifications DC Current Specifications 5730A DC Current Specificati
11. 123abc456 6 29 Operators Manual Table 6 5 Commands cont EMULATE Partially emulates a 5700A or 5720A over the remote interface This changes the model Description number in the IDN response It also accepts BTYPE VB5205 and implements it as if p BTYPE VBNONE was sent as a Fluke 5205A cannot be connected to the 5730A Calibrator Integer 5700 selects 5700A emulation 5720 selects 5720A emulation anything else Parameter selects normal 5730A behavior EMULATE 5720 Example Sets 5720A emulation EMULATE Description Returns the state of emulation as set by the EMULATE command Parameter None Response Integer 5700 for 5700A emulation 5720 for 5720A emulation 0 for normal behavior ENETPORT Description Sequential command Ignored if not in remote Sets the Ethernet port number Parameter Port number ENETPORT 3490 Example Sets the Ethernet port number to 3490 ENETPORT Description Sequential command Returns the Ethernet port number Parameter None Response Integer ENETPORT Example i Returns 3490 if the Ethernet port number is set to 3490 EOL Ed Sequential command Ignored if not in remote Sets the end of line terminator for Description j outgoing data for a specified remote port 1 SERIAL USB ENET Parameter 2 CRLF CR LF EOL ENET CR Example Sets the end of line terminator for Ethernet communication to CR Remote Commands and Syntax 6 Commands
12. Linearity Checking With Offset and Scale To program an offset l Set the Calibrator to output 0 mV dc The easiest way to do this is to push GJ then push Ezzma 2 Adjust the Calibrator output with the rotary knob and arrow keys if necessary until the UUT reads 0 V 3 Touch Offset This stores the output value as the offset value The Calibrator output value is now 0 V minus the offset value in this example the 1 3 mV output value is shown on the largest font on the Display The Calibrator reference value is set to O V The reference and offset values are shown on the display as seen below 12 21 12 10 52am 3 1 year 213 days since calibration Standby 1 3000 mv Reference Offset 0 00000 mV 1 30000 mV hhp134 eps If a new value is entered the offset value is subtracted from the new value to create the new output The newly entered value becomes the new reference value shown on the display For example if 1 V is entered the displayed true value is 0 99870000 V and the displayed reference is 1 0000000 V The offset remains in effect until Offset is touched again a different output function is selected Setup Menu is touched or ael or are pushed Front Panel Operation 4 Program a Scale Factor Program a Scale Factor Use the Scale selection in ac and dc voltage and current functions to apply a scale factor to subsequent outputs The Scale selection is shown by touching the icon on the right of
13. Mains Voltage Selection The 5730A Calibrator automatically detects the main line voltage when the soft power switch is pushed and configures itself to work at that voltage level Nominal mains voltages ranging from 100 Vrms 120 Vrms and from 220 Vrms 240 Vrms 10 are acceptable with frequencies from 47 Hz to 63 Hz Installation 2 Mains Voltage Selection AA Warnings To prevent possible electrical shock fire or personal injury the mains fuse must be selected to match the input voltage While the product automatically detects the mains line voltage the fuse must be manually selected See Table 7 1 for replacement fuses The Calibrator comes with the appropriate line power plug for the country of purchase If a different type is necessary refer to Table 2 2 and Figure 2 1 They list and show the mains line power plug types available from Fluke Calibration Table 2 2 Line Power Cord Types Available from Fluke Calibration Type Fluke Option Number North America Universal Euro United Kingdom Switzerland Australia South Africa Brazil North American Japan Universal Euro LC 1 SG d Australia China South Africa LC 6 Ag LC 7 Figure 2 1 Available Mains Power Cord Types hhp004 eps 2 5 5730A Operators Manual A PT i o ao ar A M n ate FUSE T3A250V T 1 5A250V THAT FILTER IS PROPERLY INS A hhp005 eps Figure 2 2
14. Tracking the accuracy drift of calibration and other equipment by applying statistical analysis to correction factors obtained during calibration 5730A Operators Manual random error Any error which varies in an unpredictable manner in absolute value and in sign when measurements of the same value of a quantity are made under effectively identical conditions range The stated upper end of a measurement device s span Usually however a measurement device can measure quantities for a specified percentage overrange The absolute span including overrange capability is called scale In the Calibrator however range and scale are identical range calibration An optional calibration procedure available to the enhance the Calibrator specifications by nulling the output to an external standard reference amplifier DC voltage references developed for the Calibrator These are 6 5V hybrid devices consisting of a zener diode and a transistor on a heated substrate These reference amplifiers exhibit extremely low uncertainty and drift and are superior to zener diode or temperature compensated zener diode voltage references reference standard The highest echelon standard in a laboratory the standard that is used to maintain working standards that are used in routine calibration and comparison procedures relative accuracy Calibrator accuracy specifications that exclude the effects of external dividers and standards for use w
15. push Qto clear that digit The illustration of the display below assumes an entry of 125 mA 3 14 2013 10 52am 0 00050mvV 1 year 213 days since calibration Operate 0 00000 mv 125mA hhp119 eps Front Panel Operation 4 Set the Output 8 Enter a frequency with the numeric keypad followed by El if necessary The display now shows the amplitude and frequency of the entry If an entry error is made push to clear the display then reenter the value If the most recent digit entered is in error push ff to clear that digit The display below assumes an entry of 2 5 kHz 3 14 2013 10 52am 0 00050mV 1 year 213 days since calibration Operate 0 00000 mv 125mA 2 5kHz 9 Push QUERY The Calibrator clears the entry from the entry bar near the bottom and shows in the larger area above No current is available at the output terminals until is pushed 10 Push Ezzm3 to activate the Calibrator output The UUT will now respond to the applied current hhp120 eps In AC current output the selections available at the bottom are e Current Output e External Guard e Boost e Wideband e Setup Menu In addition the Phase Control and Scale functions are available The output range is always automatically chosen and cannot be locked in ac current Note The Calibrator stays in the ac function after a non zero frequency is entered To change back to dc enter a frequency of 0 Hz or push and then aua
16. 0 5 80 0 5 30 0 3 5043 400 5 5045 80 20 800 50 75 100 100 150 200 300 Temperature Coefficient Compliance 0 10 C and rd 40 Limits 10 40 C 40 50 C ppm output nA C 50 5 20 5 4 0 5 10 1 20 100 5045 20 4 4 1 10 100 50 400 50 10 20 10 4 10 10 500 50 1000 50 0 05 20 0 05 4 0 1 10 2 50 5 50 5 20 5 10 0 5 20 1 20 100 50 5 20 4 10 2 20 100 50 400 50 10 20 10 10 20 20 400 50 1000 50 0 05 20 0 05 10 0 1 20 2 50 5 5725A Amplifier 20 75 40 75 100 75 30 75 50 75 100 75 Maximum Resistive Load For Full Accuracy Noise and Distortion Bandwidth 10 Hz 50 kHz lt 0 5V Burden output uA 0 05 0 1 0 05 0 1 0 05 0 1 0 25 0 5 00 5 1 0 05 0 1 0 05 0 1 0 05 0 1 0 25 0 5 00 5 1 0 05 0 1 0 05 0 1 0 05 0 1 0 25 0 5 00 5 1 0 05 10 0 05 10 0 05 10 0 25 50 00 5 100 0 5 100 0 3 500 1 1mA output Maximum output from 5730A terminals is 2 2 A Accuracy specifications for 220 uA and 2 2 mA ranges are increased by a factor of 1 3 plus 2 uA when supplied through 5725A terminals Specifications are otherwise identical for all output locations Stability specifications are included in the Absolute Accuracy values for the primary specifications Temperature coefficient is an adder to accuracy specifications that does not apply
17. 5 Push to turn on the Calibrator From the Ethernet Setup menu the dynamic IP address assigned to the Calibrator can be checked Set a Static Internet Address The 5730A Calibrator comes from the factory with 169 254 001 001 in the static IP address register Note If the Calibrator is to be used on a corporate LAN and DHCP is not used contact the network administrator for a static IP address to be used exclusively by the Calibrator DHCP must be disabled to set a static IP address To change the Calibrator static IP Address 1 Touch Setup Menu gt Instrument Setup gt Remote Port gt Ethernet Setup to get to the Ethernet Setup menu Touch IP Address Use the numeric keypad to enter the IP address and then push GREG If a mistake is made when the IP address is entered must be pushed Note The IP address is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power is removed and reapplied to the Calibrator or when the Calibrator receives an RST command Configure the General Network Socket Port In order to communicate with each other a client computer and the 5730A Calibrator must use the same socket port number The default port is 3490 Typically the default port does not need to be changed If the socket port must be changed enter the Socket Port number supplied by the network administrator To change the Socket Port number 1 Touch Setup Menu gt Instrument Setup gt Remote Port gt Ethernet Setup to get
18. C g Frequency temperature Range Resolution hz 24 Hours 90Days 180Days 1Year 24 Hours 90 Days ppm output nA 260 20 280 20 290 20 300 20 260 20 280 20 170 12 180 12 190 12 200 12 130 12 150 12 220 uA 1 nA 115 10 117 10 118 10 120 10 100 10 110 10 300 15 320 15 340 15 350 15 250 15 280 15 1000 80 1100 80 1200 80 1300 80 900 80 1000 80 260 50 280 50 290 50 300 50 260 50 280 50 170 40 180 40 190 40 200 40 130 40 150 40 2 2mA 10 nA 115 40 117 40 118 40 120 40 100 40 110 40 210 130 220 130 230 130 240 130 190 130 220 130 1000 800 1100 800 1200 800 1300 800 900 800 1000 800 260 500 280 500 290 500 300 500 260 500 280 500 170 400 180 400 190 400 200 400 130 400 150 400 22 mA 100 nA 115 400 117 400 118 400 120 400 100 400 110 400 210 700 220 700 230 700 240 700 190 700 220 700 1000 6000 1100 6000 1200 6000 1300 6000 900 6000 1000 6000 i 2 ppm output pA 260 5 280 5 290 5 300 5 260 5 280 5 170 4 180 4 190 4 200 4 130 4 150 4 220 mA 1 pA 115 3 117 3 118 3 120 3 100 3 110 3 210 4 220 4 230 4 240 4 190 4 220 4 1000 12 1100 12 1200 12 1300 12 900 12 1000 12 270 40 280 40 290 40 300 40 260 40 280 40 2 2A 10 pA 440 100 460 100 480 100 500 100 420 100 440 100 600
19. Out Lo To Sense Lo Continuity Fault A 21 5730A Operators Manual A 22 3819 A8 Relay Fault 3824 A8 Oven Regulation Fault 3825 Assembly A8 Not Responding 3826 A8 8255 Was Reset 3827 Assembly A8 Too Hot 3900 Level Faults Self Diagnostics Wideband 3900 A5 8255 Control Word 3901 Ab 8255 Port A Fault 3902 Ab 8255 Port B Fault 3903 Ab 8255 Port C Fault 3904 Optional Assemblies A5 A6 Are Missing 3905 A6 Phase Lock Loop Fault 3906 A6 Phase Lock Loop Fault At 30Mhz 3907 A5 RMS Sensor Fault 3908 A5 RMS Sensor Fault At 30Mhz 3909 A5 RMS Sensor Fault At 6 5V DC in 3910 A5 A6 Ampl Control Fault 3911 A5 A6 Ampl Control Fault At 30Mhz 3912 A5 A6 Output Offset Fault 3913 A5 A6 Output Offset Fault At 30Mhz 3914 A5 0 DB Output Attenuation Fault 3915 A5 10 DB Output Attenuation Fault 3916 A5 20 DB Output Attenuation Fault 3917 A5 30 DB Output Attenuation Fault 3918 A5 40 DB Output Attenuation Fault 3922 A5 A6 Wideband Initialization Fault 3923 A5 8255 Was Reset 4000 Level Faults Analog Sequencing 4000 Bad Sequence ID 4001 Over Nested Subsequences 4002 Bad Sequence Command Code 4003 Bad Reply Size From Inguard 4004 Reply From Inguard Too Small Appendices Fault Codes A 4005 False MSG Semaphore from I
20. Resistance Outputs enen ni ia thet ues deaaced i A 4 24 Wideband AC Voltage Output Option 57004A 03 ee 4 27 Variable Phase Output epe cene eii De eee neo E 4 29 Phase Locking to an External Signal eee 4 30 Auxiliary Amplifier Use iae oi deep 4 31 3725 Amplifier Output 2 titt tte ei lo b n EP ER Rude 4 32 52120A Transconductance Amplifier Output eee 4 33 Error Mode Operation ouo eerte ee Pee erre ete tea Re pee cda 4 33 Error Mode Overview iuto eure air eerie 4 34 Entet Etro Mode t e etes iet pete tee ge 4 34 Exit Error Modes ioter ie eere RU REPRE EHE 4 34 Use Error Mode 4 ent neo te ee rte ette eet co tere E PER Dee 4 35 Read the UUT Error AC and DC Voltage and Current Output 4 35 Read the UUT Error Resistance Output eese 4 36 Introduction to Offset Scale and Linearity Errors esses 4 36 Offset Erro 34 2 tti d A he oed Den oou Ue mcd oss 4 37 Scale Erroreen eoa an aE de Mer BPO De OE A 4 37 aneatity Error st erteilen et re A 4 38 Combine the Error Types eese nennen nennen nennen 4 39 Contents continued Program an Offset ee AREE e b ure ede 4 40 Program a Scale Factors eee eem a Pte e etes 4 41 Linearity Check with Offset and Scale sse 4 42 set up the CalibratoE en petet eni te tree eet eee idees 4 46 Setup Menus iiec Ee RENE H
21. The subsequent sections describe the reports To save a calibration report 1 2 3 Put a flash drive into the front USB port Go to Setup Menu gt Calibration gt Generate Report Select one of the three reports Save Calibration Shifts Save Check Shifts Save Raw Data Once an item is selected the report is loaded to a USB flash drive The report is in comma separated value CSV format and is capable of being imported into a spreadsheet program such as Microsoft Excel 4 Open or print the file from the PC Calibration Shift Results The Calibration Shift report presents all adjustments made to stored zero offset and gain constants as a result of any drift detected at the most recent calibration This report is available and valid at any time The report contains this information Heading containing the date and time the report was saved the user report string and the installed version of the Calibrator software Modules present installed or attached including any attached amplifiers Most recent calibration dates and temperatures Values of externally calibrated internal references including the resistance reference which is the average of the actual to nominal ratios of the 100 Q 190 Q 1 kQ 1 9 kQ 10 kQ 19 kQ 100 kQ and 190 kQ resistors DC voltage output shifts for each range AC voltage output shifts for each range A gain shift for all frequencies is shown along with shifts at selected frequencies f
22. To view this information touch Setup Menu gt About This Instrument Much of the information is summarized in this menu Touch Software Information to get more detail about the installed firmware Touch Hardware Information to get more detail about installed assemblies and attached auxiliary amplifiers 4 58 Chapter 5 Remote Interface Setup Title Page Introd CtlOn 2 pbi eet t teri ER Pei i Deos Etc 5 3 GPIB IEEE 488 Interact sienien e E a ri 5 3 Use the IEEE 488 Port for Remote Control eee 5 3 IEBE 488 Bus Restrictions eode ea eee 5 3 Bus Setup Procedure iie ete ee OO e t RU eget 5 4 IEEE 488 Interface Configuration essere rennen 5 4 Bus Communication Overview esses rennen nnne 5 5 RS 232 Setial Interface niente Deere ee RR SEE EaR Ea TEER 5 5 Use the RS 232 Port for Remote Control eee 5 5 RS 232 Interface Specifications eese rennen 5 6 Set Up and Connect the Serial Interface sse 5 6 Serial Remote Control Setup Procedure eene 5 7 Exceptions for Serial Remote Control eee 5 7 Ethernet Interface ida ee ties oe Reis 5 8 Set Up and Connect the Ethernet Interface eese 5 8 Set the P Address ian cote eR eatem aes 5 8 Select the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP 5 8 Set a Static Internet Address
23. and the lower eight bits except bits 6 and 1 represent various conditions of the Calibrator The ESR is cleared set to 0 when the power is turned on and every time it is read A mask register called the Event Status Enable register ESE allows the controller to enable or mask disable each bit in the ESR When a bit in the ESE is 1 the corresponding bit in the ESR is enabled When any enabled bit in the ESR is 1 the ESB bit in the Serial Poll Status Byte also goes to 1 The ESR bit stays 1 until the controller reads the ESR or does a device clear a selected device clear or sends the reset or CLS command to the Calibrator The ESE is cleared set to 0 when the power is turned on Bit Assignments for the ESR and ESE PON Power on This bit is set to 1 if the power supply has been turned off and on since the last time the ESR was read CME Command error fault The Calibrator IEEE 488 interface encountered an incorrectly formed command The command FAULT fetches the earliest fault code in the fault queue which contains fault codes for the first 15 faults that have occurred EXE Execution error fault A fault occurred when the Calibrator tried to execute the last command One possible cause for this error is a parameter that is out of range The command FAULT fetches the earliest fault in the fault queue which contains fault codes for the first 15 faults that have occurred DDE Device dependent error fault A fault relat
24. errors in one term full scale The maximum reading of a range of a meter analog to digital converter or other measurement device or the maximum attainable output on a range of a calibrator gain error Same as scale error Scale or gain error results when the slope of the meter s response curve is not exactly 1 A meter with only gain error no offset or linearity error will read OV with OV applied but something other than 10V with 10V applied 5730A Operators Manual ground The voltage reference point in a circuit Earth ground is a connection through a ground rod or other conductor to the earth usually accessible through the ground conductor in an ac power receptacle ground loops Undesirable currents induced when there is more than one chassis ground potential in a system of instruments Ground loops can be minimized by connecting all instruments in a system to ground to one point guard See voltage guard and current guard International System of Units Same as SI System of Units the accepted system of units See also units base units and derived units legal units The highest echelon in a system of units for example the U S National Bureau of Standards volt life cycle cost The consideration of all elements contributing to the cost of an instrument throughout its useful life This includes initial purchase cost service and maintenance cost and the cost of support equipment line
25. 1 Divider Fault 3312 A9 A10 Ohms 1 1 Divider Fault 3313 A9 A10 10 KQ Diagnostic Fault 3314 A9 A10 19 KQ Cal Diag Fault 3315 A9 A10 10 Q Cal Diag Fault 3316 A9 A10 19 Q Cal Diag Fault 3317 A9 A10 100 KQ Ratio Fault 3318 A9 A10 190 KQ Ratio Fault 3319 A9 A10 1 MO Ratio Fault 3320 A9 A10 1 9 MQ Ratio Fault 3321 A9 A10 10 MQ Ratio Fault 3322 A9 A10 19 MO Ratio Fault 1 3323 A9 A10 19 MQ Ratio Fault 2 3324 A9 A10 100 MQ Ratio Fault 3325 A9 A10 10 K O Check Fault 3326 A9 A10 19 K Q Check Fault 3327 A9 A10 1 K Q Check Fault 3328 A9 A10 1 9 K Q Check Fault 3329 A9 A10 100 O Check Fault 3330 A9 A10 190 O Check Fault 3331 A9 A10 10 Check Fault 3332 A9 A10 19 Q Check Fault A 18 Appendices Fault Codes A 3333 A9 A10 1 Q Check Fault 3334 A9 A10 1 9 Q Check Fault 3335 A9 A10 Ohms Short Check Fault 3336 A9 A10 2 Wire Compensation Fault 3337 A9 A10 Ohms Correction Factor Fault 3338 Assembly A9 Not Responding 3339 A9 8255 Was Reset 3340 A9 A10 100 Q Cal Diag Fault 3341 A9 A10 190 Q Cal Diag Fault 3400 Level Faults Self Diagnostics Oscillator 3400 A12 8255 Control Word 3401 A12 8255 Port A 3402 A12 8255 Port B 3403 A12 8255 Port C 3404 A13 8255 Control Word 3405 A13 8255 Port A 3406 A13 8255
26. 14 5725A voltage diagnostics Calibration dc reference 15 5725A current diagnostics Response Calibration dc reference 16 5725A voltage troubleshooting Calibration 1 Q reference 17 5725A current troubleshooting ON oO c1 WYN Calibration 10 kQ reference 18 Analog output tripped to dormant o Calibration internal adjustment 19 Starting up 2 String Substate If operating self calibrating diagnosing or testing returns a descriptive string of the activity underway STB Sequential command Description 7 Returns the status byte The status byte is described under Status Information Parameter None Integer Decimal equivalent of the status byte STB Example UN f Returns 72 if bits 3 EAV and 6 MSS are set 1 and the rest of the bits are reset 0 STBY n Overlapped command ignored if not in remote Description Puts the Calibrator in standby SUBNETMASK Description Sequential command Ignored if not in remote Sets Ethernet subnet mask for LAN P communication when NOT in DHCP mode Parameter Subnet mask quoted string consisting of 4 decimal values bound between 0 255 separated by periods SUBNETMASK 255 255 254 0 Example Sets the Ethernet subnet mask to 255 255 254 0 6 46 Remote Commands and Syntax 6 Commands Table 6 5 Commands cont SUBNETMASK Sequential command Returns Ethernet subnet mask for LAN communication SUBNETMASK Example Returns 255 2
27. 16 entries If many faults occur only the first 15 faults are kept in the queue A 16th entry in the queue is always a fault queue overflow fault and all later faults are discarded until the queue is at least partially read The first faults are kept because if many faults occur before the user can acknowledge and read them the earliest faults are the most likely to point to the problem The later faults are usually repetitions or consequences of the original problem The OPER command is inhibited for outputs of 22 V or greater whenever there is a fault in the fault queue The OPER command remains inhibited until either the fault queue or the ESR is cleared 6 57 5730A Operators Manual Note The Calibrator Main CPU software revision levels can be checked with the Instmt Config Menu or IDN remote command After the Calibrator has encountered a fault do one of the subsequent actions to reenable the OPER command 1 Send CLS to clear the ESR and fault queue 2 Send ESR to read and clear the ESR 3 Repeatedly send the FAULT query until 0 is returned indicating that all faults from the queue have been read and cleared 6 58 Chapter 7 Operator Maintenance and Calibration Title Page Introd ctlOn 2 bic eet t Herbie iei t e Deo E bcd 7 2 Fuse Replacement ssoi td e ded tesa ede eter der 7 2 Clean the Air Filtet Lom ete tte t edet ets 7 4 Clean the Exterior desi eeu eem enge 7 5 User Re placeable Parts
28. 2 Each rear panel feature is briefly described in Table 3 2 o REMOVE FILT FLUSH WITH SOAPY WATER DRY BEFORE REINSTALLATION WARNING TO AVOID PHYSICAL INJURY INSURE THAT FILTER IS PROPERLY INSTALLED BEFORE ENERGIZING INSTRUMENT WARNING TO AVOID ELECTRIC SHOCK GROUNDING CONNECTOR IN POWER CORD MUST BE CONNECTED IEEEA8S Ke ce amp hhp009 eps Figure 3 2 Rear Panel Features Table 3 2 Rear Panel Features Description The filter covers the air intake to keep dust and debris out of chassis Fans inside the Calibrator provide a constant cooling air flow throughout the Fan Filter chassis Circuitry inside the Calibrator monitors correct operation of the internal fans Provides the analog and digital interface for the Fluke 52120A Transconductance Amplifier After the 52120A is connected to the 52120A 52120A AMPLIFIER connector control the 52120A from the Calibrator front panel Transconductance or by remote commands Refer to Auxiliary Amplifier Use in Chapter 4 for Amplifier Connector details Provides the analog and digital interface for the Fluke 5725A Amplifier After the 5725A is connected to the 5725A AMPLIFIER connector control 9725A Amplifier the 5725A from the Calibrator front panel or by remote commands Refer to Connector Auxiliary Amplifier Use in Chapter 4 for details Provides access to a variable phase nominal 2 5 V rm
29. 2 A AC Range Mag Fault 3138 A14 A15 A16 2 2 A AC Range Compliance 3139 A14 A15 A16 2 2 A AC Range Amplitude 3140 A14 A15 A16 2 2 A AC Range Abs Value 3141 A14 A15 A16 2 2 A DC Range Dummy Load 3142 A14 A15 A16 2 2 A DC Range Compliance 3143 A14 A15 A16 2 2 A DC Range Magnitude 3200 Level Faults Self Diagnostics Misc 3200 Assemblies Missing 3201 Unknown Diagnostic Test 3202 5725 ACV Sense Amp Fault 3203 5725 ACV Standby 5725 Fault 3204 5725 ACV Operate 5725 Fault 3205 5725 ACV Cal Sensor Test Died 3206 5725 ACV Cal Sensor Fault 3207 5725 ACV VLF 100 Hz will not Converge 3208 5725 ACV LF 1 kHz will not Converge 3209 5725 ACV MF 10 kHz will not Converge 3210 5725 ACV HF 100 kHz will not Converge 3211 5725 Current Path To Shunt Open 3212 5725 Shunt Sense Open 3213 5725 Shunt Measurement Out Of Tolerance 3214 5725 Current Amplifier Offset Too Large 3215 5725 Current Drive Path Open 3216 5725 Current Error Amplifier Failure A 17 5730A Operators Manual 3217 5725 Amplifer Not Connected 3300 Level Faults Self Diagnostics Ohms 3300 A9 8255 Control Word 3301 A9 8255 Port A Fault 3302 A9 8255 Port B Fault 3303 A9 8255 Port C Fault 3304 A9 10 V Source Fault 3305 A9 5 V Source Fault 3306 A9 2 V Source Fault 3308 A9 Diff Amp Offset Fault 3309 A9 Diff Amp Gain Fault 3310 A9 Diff Amp Noise Fault 3311 A9 A10 Ohms 10
30. 224 Output Tripped To Standby 225 5725 Fan Not Working 226 5725 CLAMPS Fault 227 Output Tripped To Standby 228 5725 Software TRAP 229 5725 Cable Was Off 230 5725 RESET power up or watchdog timer 231 5725 Guard Crossing Timeout 232 5725 Illegal Unexecutable Command 233 5725 Non Maskable Interrupt Occurred 234 5725 HVCLEAR Circuit Activated 235 Output Tripped To Standby 400 Level Faults Calibration Constant 400 Bad Cal Constant ID 500 Level Faults Configuration Finder 500 Bad Mode To CNFmodeRanges 501 Configuration Table Overflow 502 Bad Amplifier Type Selection 503 Bad Flat Constant Type Selection 504 Guard Crossing Error While Polling Assemblies 505 5725 Guard Crossing would not Start 700 Level Faults Error Handling 700 Error Queue Overflow 701 Bad ERR Channel 800 Level Faults Executive 800 Wideband Module Needed Appendices Fault Codes A 801 Amplifier Not Selected or Connected 802 Amplifier Must Remain On For This Output 803 Over Limits Of Locked Range 804 Under Limits Of Locked Range 806 Invalid Date 807 Invalid Time 808 DC dBm Not Allowed 809 Ext Ref Value Out Of Range 810 Bad Edit Digit Movement 811 Not Wideband Units 812 Cannot Set Frequency With Ohms 813 Bad Units 814 Wrong Polarity For Limit 815 Outside Entry Limits 816 Magnitude Too Large For Calibrator 817 Magnitude Too Small For Calibrat
31. 4 180 4 460 5 900 10 1200 20 2500 20 220 12 85 7 55 7 110 7 298 17 583 20 1200 25 2500 45 220 40 80 15 39 8 63 10 81 30 300 80 900 200 1500 300 220 400 80 150 39 50 63 100 80 200 243 600 900 2000 1300 3200 230 4 87 4 77 4 190 4 480 5 1000 10 1300 20 2600 20 230 4 87 4 77 4 190 4 480 5 1000 10 1300 20 2600 20 230 12 87 7 56 7 115 7 303 17 600 20 1300 25 2600 45 230 40 85 15 40 8 65 10 82 30 314 80 950 200 1600 300 230 400 85 150 40 50 65 100 81 200 249 600 900 2000 1400 3200 240 4 90 4 80 4 200 4 500 5 1050 10 1400 20 2700 20 240 4 90 4 80 4 200 4 500 5 1050 10 1400 20 2700 20 240 12 90 7 5747 120 7 310 17 655 20 1400 25 2700 45 240 40 90 15 42 8 67 10 85 30 336 80 1000 200 1700 300 240 400 90 150 42 50 67 100 83 200 254 600 1000 2000 1500 3200 200 4 80 4 50 4 70 4 160 5 280 10 320 10 650 20 800 20 2100 20 2400 20 200 4 220 4 80 4 85 4 50 4 55 4 70 4 80 4 160 5 180 5 280 10 320 10 650 20 800 20 2100 20 2400 20 200 12 220 12 80 7 85 7 50 7 55 7 70 7 80 7 160 17 180 17 280 20 320 20 650 25 800 25 2100 45 12400 45 200 40 220 40 75 15 80 15 254
32. 4 23 5730A Operators Manual The Current Output item selects one of three locations for non boosted current sourced by the Calibrator for example current output OUTPUT binding post NORMAL which is the OUTPUT HI binding post also the default setting AUX which is the AUX CURRENT OUTPUT binding post Boost which is the 5725A Amplifier binding posts The 5725A must be turned on but not necessarily activated Non boosted current from the Calibrator is not available at the 52120A amplifier binding posts Resistance Output In the resistance function the Calibrator supplies a choice of 18 standard resistance values or a short at the output terminals The values available are 02 190 Q 190 KQ 1 0 Q 1 0 kQ 1 0 MQ 1 9 Q 1 9 KQ 1 9 MQ 10 Q 10 KQ 10 MQ 19 Q 19 kQ 19 MQ 100 Q 100 kQ 100 MO To select a resistance output 1 4 24 Make sure the Calibrator is in standby STANDBY annunciator lit Push if necessary If the UUT is not connected connect it now as described previously in this chapter under Connect the Calibrator to a UUT Set the UUT to read resistance on the appropriate range Push the numeric keys of the nominal resistance or touch Q Value Table to show a list of the selectable resistance values as shown below 12 21 12 10 52am 3 1 year 213 days since calibration Operate 0 9995662 o hhp225 eps Front Panel Operation 4 Set the Output If the Q Value Table s
33. 50 1000 50 1000 10 200 0 05 10 000 20 40 80 150 15 300 15 300 10 200 0 05 10 000 40 20 k 12 80 2 80 4 80 10 300 0 05 10 000 20k 50k 15 100 10 100 20 100 30 600 0 05 10 000 50 k 100 k 15 100 10 500 20 500 80 3 000 0 2 50 000 100 k 300 k 30 400 80 600 80 600 250 25 000 1 5 50 000 300 k 500 k 100 10 000 80 800 80 800 500 50 000 1 5 50 000 500 k 1M 200 20 000 80 1000 80 1000 1000 110 000 3 5 100 000 ERE EFE ppm output mV ppm output C ppm output mV output 4100 V 15 50 150 0 5 50 50 10 2 0 15 50 1k 20 0 5 2 5 10 1 0 07 1 21 5730A Operators Manual 1 22 5725A Amplifier T Temperature Coefficient Distortion l a bd Adder TEE Bandwidth Range Frequency 1 C d agscand 1229 Regulation 10 Hz 10 MHz 24 Hours 10 40 C 0 50 C output ppm output mV lt r output C ppm output mV EETA 1000 pF 10 1 90 6 275 11 500 30 Stability specifications are included in Absolute Accuracy values for the primary specifications 2 The 5725A will drive up to 1000 pF of load capacitance Accuracy specifications include loads to 300 pF and 150 pF as shown under Load Limits For capacitances up to the maximum of 1000 pF add Load Regulation Voltage Range Maximum Current Limits Load Limits 50 mA 0 C 40 C gt 50 Q 20 mA 40 C 50 C 1000 pF
34. 7003 spade lugs Note 5440A 7002 and 5440A 7003 Low Thermal Lead sets include a third cable specifically designed for completing Artifact Calibration The 5730A 7002 and 5730A 7003 Low Thermal Lead sets do not include the third cable for connection between reference standards Proceed as follows to adjust the 220 V dc range constant the procedure is similar for all ranges The calibration to external standards must be completed before this procedure is done Operator Maintenance and Calibration Range Adjustment 1 Touch Setup Menu gt Calibration gt Range Adjustment to bring up the Range Adjustment menu shown below Range Adjustment DCV Resistance ACI hhp189 eps 2 Touch DCV to show the next menu shown below A Range gt Setup Menu X Calibration Adjustment DC V Range Calibration 220 mV 2 2V 11V 22V 220V hhp190 eps 5730A Operators Manual 3 Touch 220 V and this screen is shown A Range gt Setup Menu X Calibration Adjustment Enter nominal value then press ENTER 5 Connect the 732B 8508A Null Detector and 752B in a 10 1 configuration as shown in Figure 7 6 hhp216 eps 6 Multiply the 732B value by 10 and enter this new value The Calibrator output will be nulled to this new value 7 Push to show this display 3 Range 2 Setup Menu X Calibration Adjustment 220 V Standby Press OPERATE Adjust with k
35. COMMAND PROGRAM HEADER except QUERY PROGRAM HEADER that is contains a query indicator since a response form the device is expected COMMAND PROGRAM HEADER A data type suitable for sending short mnemonic data CHARACTER PROGRAM DATA generally used where a numeric data type is not suitable DECIMAL NUMERIC PROGRAM DATA A data type suitable for sending decimal integers of decimal fractions with or without exponents NON DECIMAL NUMERIC PROGRAM A data type suitable for sending integer numeric DATA representations in base 16 8 or 2 An optional field that follows DECIAML NUMERIC SUFFIX PROGRAM DATA PROGRAM DATA and is used to indicate associated multipliers and units A data type suitable for sending 7 bit ASCII character STRING PROGRAM DATA strings where the content needs to be hidden by delimiters A data type suitable for sending blocks of arbitrary 8 bit ARBITRARY BEOCKPROGRAM DATA information Block size is limited to 1024 bytes 5730A Operators Manual Interface Messages IEEE 488 Only Interface messages manage traffic on the bus Device addressing and clearing data handshaking and commands to place status bytes on the bus are all directed by interface messages Some of the interface messages occur as state transitions of dedicated control lines The rest of the interface messages are sent over the data lines with the ATN signal true All device dependent and common commands are sent over the data lines with t
36. Coil eese 1 35 52120A COIL 6 KA 50 Turn Coil esee 1 35 1 1 5730A Operators Manual 1 2 Introduction and Specifications Introduction 1 Introduction and Specifications 1 Introduction Introduction The Fluke Calibration 5730A Calibrator the Calibrator or the Product can calibrate a wide variety of electrical measurement instruments The 5730A Calibrator maintains a high accuracy over a wide ambient temperature range This accuracy lets the Calibrator test instruments in any environment and eliminates the restrictions to calibrate only in a temperature controlled standards laboratory The Calibrator can calibrate precision multimeters that measure ac or dc voltage ac or dc current and resistance The Calibrator also is available with a Wideband AC Voltage option which extends this workload to include RF voltmeters Specifications are provided at the end of this chapter The 5730A Calibrator is a fully programmable precision source of e DC voltage to 1100 V e AC voltage to 1100 V with output available from 10 Hz to 1 2 MHz e AC and DC current to 2 2 A with output available from 10 Hz to 10 kHz e Resistance in values from 1 Q to 100 MO plus a short e Optional wideband ac voltage from 300 uV to 3 5 V into 50 Q 57 dBm to 24 dBm 10 Hz to 30 MHz Features of the 5730A Calibrator include e Internal environmentally controlled references that let the Calibrator mainta
37. End line which happens when the Calibrator transmits the ASCII character LF for its termination sequence or terminator Data DAC Sets the handshake signal line NDAC low Accepted Data Valid Asserts the handshake signal line DAV ies For Sets the handshake signal line NRFD low A control line that can be asserted by any device on the bus to indicate that it requires attention For details see Check the Calibrator Status Status Byte The response sent to a serial poll SPE by the Calibrator Service Request 5730A Operators Manual Use of OPC OPC and WAI The OPC OPC and WAI commands are used to maintain control of the order of execution of commands that could otherwise be passed up by subsequent commands If an OUT command had been sent check if the output has settled by sending the query OPC As soon as the OUT command has completed output settled a 1 is shown in the output buffer Always follow a OPC command with a read command The read command causes program execution to pause until the addressed instrument responds The OPC command is similar in operation to the OPC query except that it sets bit 0 OPC for Operation Complete in the Event Status Register to 1 rather than sending a 1 to the output buffer One simple use for OPC is to include it in a program in order for it to generate an SRQ Service Request Then an SRQ handler written into the program can detect the operatio
38. Errors Figure 4 9 illustrates linearity error with both offset and scale errors assumed to be zero The formula for linearity error yields 10 0 9 993 Linearity Error GE 0 000352 0 0352 19 900 V Linear Response Calibrator Setting Error Linearity f 0 000 V 7 mV 9 993 V Actual Response 10 000 V 19 900 V Meter Reading hhp019 eps Figure 4 9 Linearity Error Combine the Error Types The actual error of a meter is the combination of all three types of errors The Calibrator uses the Scale and Offset selections to separately show all three types of errors directly without any calculation 4 39 5730A Operators Manual Program an Offset 4 40 The Offset selection can be used when in the dc voltage or current function any time it is necessary to offset the 5730A Calibrator output by a fixed amount The Offset selection is shown by touching the icon on the right of the display above the bottom row of selections After an offset is established it is subtracted from all later keyboard entries to compensate for a UUT offset error Touch Offset again to turn off this offset Both the offset value and the keypad entered reference value are shown on the display along with the true output value The Offset selection may be used to establish a zero scale endpoint this can then be used with the Scale selection to check the linearity of a UUT See the example under
39. Guard On Selected Range 855 Cannot Set String Cal Is Secured 856 Present Output Exceeds Selected Limit 857 Bad Selector For Reference Calibration 858 Cannot Change Range Now 859 Hardware Not Installed For This Range 860 Cannot Use Amplifier For This Output 861 5725 Cannot Ext Sense At That Frequency 862 Change To HI Outputs For 120 A Range 1000 Level Faults 5725 Communication Receive 1000 Could not ACK Packet From 5725 1001 Illegal 5725 Receive Task State 1002 Bad Receive Packet Number From 5725 1003 Bad Control Byte From 5725 1100 Level Faults 5725 Communication Transmit 1100 Multiple Timeouts Sending To 5725 Appendices Fault Codes A 1101 5725 RQR Loop 1102 Unexpected NSA From 5725 1103 Bad Packet Number In ACK From 5725 1104 Bad Control Byte From 5725 Receive Task 1105 Illegal 5725 Transmit Task State 1106 5725 Indefinite ACKWAIT Holdoff 1200 Level Faults 5725 Communication Utility 1200 Serial Write Failure To 5725 1201 Packet Too Large For 5725 1300 Level Faults Output Monitor 1301 Output Tripped To Standby 1302 Output Tripped To Standby 1303 DC Zero Is Needed Every 30 Days 1400 Level Faults Software Timer 1400 Cannot Install MTtick 1401 Bad Timer Selector 1500 Level Faults Guard Crossing Receive 1500 Could not ACK Packet From Inguard 1501 Illegal Inguard Receive Task State 1502 Bad Receive Packet Number F
40. Pei ti De EP 4 3 Turn onthe Calibratot i tet ER et ne eerte ieu 4 3 bone Tm mS 4 4 Product Use iiie aureo e MO RHET OLEI 4 4 Reset the Calibratot 2 iae m eate eie casei qe ate D ute gat 4 4 Operate and Standby Modes sees 4 4 Connect the Calibrator to a UUT sse rennen nnne 4 5 Recommended Cable and Connector Types eese 4 5 When to Use External Sensing esee 4 7 When to Use the External Voltage Guard see 4 7 Four Wire Vs Two Wire Resistance Connections eee 4 7 Cable Connection Instructions ener en 4 8 SIEA DUTE 0 ETE 4 15 DC Voltage Outputs inr 2 8 8 turo ES ERE Hec dp etie 4 17 AC Voltage Output oe sott itt eie erbe o ee AUCH eo CR E OR RR AS ite ae 4 18 DE Current Output 5 5 6 cete d ee Pe REO ede 4 20 AC Current OUtpUt 5 m e ene eei e et loci bt t e IR Rp Re 4 22 Resistance Output x ed dero ur Me dO entes et tug 4 24 Wideband AC Voltage Output Option 5700A 03 see 4 27 Variable Phase Output diode ectetur 4 29 Phase Locking to an External Signal eene 4 30 Auxiliaty Amplifier Use og osi eere Ere Rr enu 4 31 57254 Amplifier Output 1 ite e tee ore He ee a tee re eese ete 4 32 52120A Transconductance Amplifier Output eee 4 33 Error Mode Operdtion 1 epit e e e De He t nt e aaaea 4 33 Error Mode Overviews 5 3 doeet ante sb G
41. Port B 3407 A13 8255 Port C 3408 A13 Fixed Ampl Osc Fault 3409 A13 Phase Lock Loop Fault 3410 A12 A13 22 V Amp Bias Adj Error 3411 A12 A13 22 V Amp Nonfunctional 3412 A12 To A13 Interface Fault 3413 A12 A13 14 bit DAC Nonfunctional 3414 A12 A13 Nonlinear Control Loop 2Vrng 3415 A12 A13 nonlinear Control Loop 20Vrng 3416 A12 A13 DAC 15th Bit Fault 3417 A12 DC Sensor Buffer Fault 3418 A12 Sensor Loop Sq Root Amp Fault 3419 A12 AC Sensor Buff 2V Range 3420 A12 AC Sensor Buff 20V Range 3421 A12 AC Cal Sensor 2V Range 3422 A12 AC Cal Sensor 20V Range 3423 Assembly A12 Missing A 19 5730A Operators Manual A 20 3424 Assembly A13 Missing 3425 Assembly A12 Or A13 Not Responding 3426 A12 8255 Was Reset 3427 A13 8255 Was Reset 3500 Level Faults Self Diagnostics Power Amp 3500 A16 8255 Control Word 3501 A16 8255 Port A 3502 A16 8255 Port B 3503 A16 8255 Port C 3507 A16 PA Supplies Are Off 3508 A16 A14 220 V AC Range Output Fault 3509 A16 Amplifier Loop Not Regulated 3510 A16 220 V Amp Fault 3511 A16 Incorrect PA Input 3520 A16 PA Oven Regulation Fault 3521 Assembly A16 Is Not Responding 3524 A16 Power Amp Is Too Hot 3525 220 V DC Initialization Fault 3526 220 V AC Initialization Fault 3527 A16 Power Amp DC Cal Network Zero Fault 3528 A16 Power Amp DC Cal Network Gain Fau
42. Set with Spade Lugs Two 4 ft 122 cm cables and One 2 ft 61 cm cable 5440A 7002 Low Thermal Test Lead cables with banana plugs 5730A 7002 Low Thermal Test Lead cables with banana plugs 5440A 7003 8 3 5730A Operators Manual Low Thermal EMF Test Leads Four types of low thermal test leads are available These cables are designed to exhibit low thermal emfs The available types are e Model 5440A 7002 Low Thermal Test Lead cables with banana plugs Set includes one 4 ft 122 cm cable and two 2 ft 61 cm cables Each cable includes two conductors and a shield lead e Model 5440A 7003 Low Thermal Test Lead cables with spade lugs Set includes two 4 ft 122 cm cables and one 2 ft 61 cm cable Each cable includes two conductors and a shield lead Shield lead has a banana plug connector e Model 5730A 7002 Low Thermal Test Lead cables with banana plugs Set includes two 4 ft 122 cm cables Each cable includes two conductors and a shield lead e Model 5730A 7003 Low Thermal Test Lead cables with spade lugs Set includes two 4 ft 122 cm cables Each cable includes two conductors and a shield lead Shield lead has a banana connector Rack Mount Kits The rack mount kits provide all the hardware necessary to mount the Calibrator and the 5725A Amplifier on slides in a 24 inch 61 cm equipment rack Model Y5737 is for the 5730A and Model Y5735 is for the 5725A The Y5738 includes the Rack Ears and faste
43. Test connections Chapter 4 e Remote interface connection IEEE 488 RS 232 USB LAN Chapter 5 e Option 5700 03 Wideband AC Module connection Chapter 4 e Auxiliary amplifier connections Chapter 4 Unpack and Inspect the Calibrator The 5730A Calibrator ships in a container that prevents shipping damage Inspect the Calibrator carefully for damage and immediately report any damage to the shipper Instructions for inspection and claims are included in the shipping container When the Calibrator is unpacked check for all the standard equipment listed in Table 2 1 and check the shipping order for additional items ordered See Chapter 8 for information about options and accessories Report any shortage to the place of purchase or to the nearest Fluke Calibration Service Center See How to Contact Fluke Calibration if necessary If performance tests are necessary for your acceptance procedure they can be found in Chapter 7 If it is necessary to reship the Calibrator use the original container A new container can be ordered from Fluke Calibration See How to Contact Fluke Calibration if necessary Table 2 1 Standard Equipment Calibrator 5730A Mains Power Cord See Table 2 2 and Figure 2 1 5730A Getting Started 4290571 5730A Manual CD Containing the Operators 4290580 Manual Certificate of Calibration No part number 2 3 5730A Operators Manual Placement and Rack Mounting Put the 5730A Calibrator on top
44. Tov 600 pF 5725A Amplifier 1100 V 5 kHz 30 kHz 300 pF 30 kHz 100 kHz 70 mA P 150 pF Notes 1 The 5725A will drive up to 1000 pF of load capacitance Accuracy specifications include loads to 300 pF and 150 pF as shown under Load Limits For capacitances up to the maximum of 1000 pF add Load Regulation 2 2 2 V Range 100 kHz 1 2 MHz only accuracy specifications cover loads to 10 mA or 1000 pF For higher loads load regulation is added 3 Applies from 0 C to 40 C Output Display Formats ssssss Voltage or dBm dBm reference 600 Q Minimum Output 10 on each range External Sense sese Applicable for 2 2 V 22 V 220 V and 1100 V ranges 5730A 100 kHz 5725A 30 kHz Specifications are the same as internal sense Settling Time to Full Accuracy Frequency Hz Settling Time seconds 10 120 Notes Plus 1 second for amplitude or frequency range change Plus 2 seconds for 5730A 1100 V range Plus 4 seconds for 5725A 1100 V range Overshoot 2 d aee Totes 10 96 Common Mode Rejection 140 dB dc to 400 Hz Frequency Ranges LHz 2 0 th tr ge 10 000 119 99 0 1200 k 1 1999 k 1 200 k 11 999 k 12 00 k 119 99 k 120 0 k 1 1999 M ACCUFIaOy inihahain aA demens 0 01 96 Resolution teeth 11 999 counts Phase Lock Selectable Rear Panel BNC Input Phase Accuracy except 1100 V
45. by Serial Poll Status Byte Register 4 Read using STB Event Request Enable Register Read using SRE Write using SRE hhp050 eps 6 53 5730A Operators Manual Serial Poll Status Byte The most important and frequently used register is the serial poll status byte which is how the 5730A Calibrator responds to a serial poll This byte is cleared set to 0 when the power is turned on A serial poll cannot be done if the RS 232C port is used as the remote control interface Instead the STB command can be sent to get the same information Its bits are defined as follows bits 7 1 and 0 are always 0 RQS Requesting Service The RQS bit is set to 1 whenever bits ESB MAV EAV or ISCB change from 0 to 1 and are enabled bit 1 in the SRE When ROS is 1 the Calibrator asserts the SRQ control line on the IEEE 488 interface A serial poll can be done to read this bit to see if the Calibrator is the source of an SRQ MSS Master Summary Status Set to 1 whenever bits ESB MAV EAV or ISCB are 1 and enabled bit 1 in the SRE This bit can be read with the STB command in serial remote control in place of doing a serial poll ESB Setto 1 when one or more enabled ESR bits are 1 MAV Message Available The MAV bit is set to 1 whenever data is available in the Calibrator IEEE 488 interface output buffer EAV Error fault available A fault has occurred and a fault code is available through the FAULT query ISCB
46. encountered When positive gains calibration is complete a message is shown to refer to the manual for negative gains connections Reverse the dual banana connector so that the center connector is connected to LO Push xd The display shows progress through the procedure in the same fashion as for artifact calibration At the end of the procedure the Calibrator gives the option to save or discard the results Touch Save to store the new calibration constants The Calibrator prompts for the security passcode if it has not already been entered Enter the security passcode if it has not yet been entered Touch Discard to delete the results of the calibration In both cases the calibration screen 1s shown after the results are saved or deleted Wideband Flatness Calibration Procedure This calibration procedure and the full verification of the 5730A Calibrator should be done every 2 years For flatness calibration 1 Touch Setup Menu gt Calibration If the ambient temperature has changed from the displayed value update it Touch Run Wb Flatness Cal Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 7 12 Touch Continue setup menu d Calibration gt Wideband Flatness Calibration Operate Press OPERATE to output the reference then Continue to proceed 3 0000 v 1 0000 kHz Reference Error 3 00000 V 0 00ppm m r7 hhp221 eps 7 19 5730A Operators Manual 7 20 10 11 12 13
47. ft whichever is less 5 3 5730A Operators Manual 5 4 Bus Setup Procedure To set up the 5730A Calibrator on the IEEE 488 bus only a choice of address and the connection to a controller is necessary To set up the bus 1 With the Calibrator off attach the IEEE 488 cable to the rear panel IEEE 488 connector Fluke shielded cables Y8021 1m Y8022 2m or Y8023 4m are recommended 2 Push to turn on the Calibrator Touch Setup Menu gt Instrument Setup Remote Port 4 The IEEE 488 bus address for the Calibrator is shown in the GPIB Setup region To change it touch the editable field and enter a new address with the numerical keys 5 Ifthe Active Remote Port is not GPIB touch Active Remote Port and then touch GPIB 6 Touch Exit to exit the Setup Menu IEEE 488 Interface Configuration The 5730A Calibrator IEEE 488 interface supports the IEEE 488 interface function subsets listed in Table 5 1 Table 5 1 Supported IEEE 488 Interface Function Subsets eo wewepropmy OO OOOO i Remote Interface Setup RS 232 Serial Interface Bus Communication Overview Communication between the controller and the 5730A Calibrator takes place with commands established by IEEE 488 standards and commands specifically related to the Calibrator The commands in Tables 6 4 6 5 and 6 6 are all the remote commands both common and device dependent Definitions of the different types of messages used on the IEEE 488
48. in a predictable way temperature coefficient A factor per C deviation from a nominal value or range that the uncertainty of an instrument increases This specification is necessary to account for the thermal coefficients in a calibrator s analog circuitry test uncertainty ratio The numerical ratio of the uncertainty of the measurement system or device being calibrated to the uncertainty of the measurement system or device used as the Calibrator Also called test accuracy ratio thermal emf The voltage generated when two dissimilar metals joined together are heated traceability The ability to relate individual measurement results to national standards or nationally accepted measurement systems through an unbroken chain of comparisons for example a calibration audit trail Measurements measurement systems or devices have traceability to the designated standards if and only if scientifically rigorous evidence is produced on a continuing basis to show that the measurement process is producing measurement results for which the total measurement uncertainty relative to national or other designated standards is qualified transfer error The sum of all new errors induced during the process of comparing one quantity against another transfer standard Any working standard used to compare a measurement process system or device at one location or level with another measurement process system or device at another location o
49. internally grounded to the chassis If the Calibrator is 9 the location of the ground reference point in a system this binding post can be used for connecting other instruments to earth ground The chassis is Chassis Ground normally connected to earth ground through the three conductor line cord Binding Post instead of through the earth ground binding post Refer to Connect the Calibrator to the UUT in Chapter 4 for details USB port for remote control of the Calibrator Chapter 5 describes how to connect to the USB interface Refer Chapter 6 for remote programming Rear USB Port instructions D A male DTE serial port connector for remote control of the Calibrator Chapter 5 describes proper cabling and how to set up the Ethernet interface RS 232 Connector and connect to it Refer to Chapter 6 for remote programming instructions 100 Base T Ethernet connector for remote control of the Calibrator Chapter 2 5 describes proper cabling how to set up the interface and how to transmit Ethernet Connector data from the Calibrator Chapter 5 also describes how to use the Ethernet interface for remote control 3 A standard interface connector for operating the Calibrator in remote control as a Talker or Listener on the IEEE 488 Bus Refer to Chapter 5 for bus IEEE 488 Connector connection Refer to Chapter 6 for remote programming instructions Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation Title Page Introd ctiOn 4 1 2 pb et eerie ER
50. mains power cord is blocked e Use only the mains power cord and connector approved for the voltage and plug configuration in your country and rated for the Product e Replace the mains power cord if the insulation is damaged or if the insulation shows signs of wear e Make sure the ground conductor in the mains power cord is connected to a protective earth ground Disruption of the protective earth could put voltage on the chassis that could cause death e Do not use an extension cord or adapter plug e Do not operate the Product with covers removed or the case open Hazardous voltage exposure is possible e Do not use the Product if it operates incorrectly e Do not connect to live output terminals The Product can supply voltages that can cause death Standby mode is not sufficient to prevent electrical shock e Donotapply more than the rated voltage between the terminals or between each terminal and earth ground e Use only cables with correct voltage ratings 1 7 5730A Operators Manual e Do not touch exposed metal on banana plugs they can have voltages that could cause death e Do not touch voltages gt 30 V ac rms 42 V ac peak or 60 V dc e Use the Product only as specified or the protection supplied by the Product can be compromised e Use only specified replacement fuses e Have an approved technician repair the Product Symbols The symbols shown in Table 1 1 can be found in this manual or on
51. nA 96 350 99 350 1014350 1034350 80 350 90 350 170550 1804550 190 550 200550 160 550 170 550 800 5000 900 5000 1000 5000 1100 5000 700 5000 800 5000 ppm output uA 210 4 230 4 240 4 250 4 210 4 230 4 130 3 5 140 3 5 150 3 5 160 3 5 110 3 5 130 3 5 220 mA 96 2 5 99 2 5 101 2 5 103 2 5 80 2 5 90 2 5 170 3 5 180 3 5 190 3 5 200 3 5 160 3 5 170 3 5 800 10 900 10 1000 10 1100 10 700 10 800 10 214 35 224 35 234 35 244 35 200 35 230 35 10 uA 350 80 390 80 420 80 450 80 300 80 350 80 5000 160 6000 160 6500 160 7000 160 5000 160 6000 160 5725A Amplifier 370 170 400 170 440 170 460 170 300 170 330 170 800 380 850 380 900 380 950 380 700 380 800 38 3000 750 3300 750 3500 750 3600 750 2800 750 3200 750 11A 100 uA Note Maximum output from the calibrator s terminals is 2 2 A Accuracy specifications for 220 uA and 2 2 mA ranges are increased by 1 3 plus 2 uA when supplied through 5725A terminals 1 30 Introduction and Specifications Electrical Specifications AC Current Secondary Performance Specifications and Operating Characteristics Stability 1 c Frequency 24 Hours Hz ppm output 150 5 80 5 30 3 50 20 400 100 150 5 80 5 30 3 50 20 400 100 150 50 80 50 30 30 50 500 400 1000 150
52. numeric keys multiplier DA ENEB For example to change the present 10 mV dc to 10 mV ac at 1 8 kHz push 1 Xe SED To change the output back to dc push oT o DE The subsequent step by step procedures explain how to set an output and how to use the features available for each output function e DC voltage e AC voltage e DC current e AC current e Resistance e Wideband ac voltage 5700A 03 Option e Variable phase e Boost operation with an auxiliary amplifier Front Panel Operation 4 Set the Output DC Voltage Output To set a dc voltage output 1 po cb Oy a p 10 Make sure the Calibrator is in standby STANDBY annunciator lit Push if necessary If the UUT is not connected connect it now as described in this chapter under Connect the Calibrator to a UUT Set the UUT to measure dc voltage on the necessary range Enter a voltage value with the numeric keypad To change the polarity of the entry push Push KA E or ES if necessary Push KA The display now shows the amplitude of the entry If an entry error is made push to clear the display and then reenter the value If the most recent digit entered is in error push to clear that digit The display shown below assumes an entry of 10 mV 3 14 2013 10 52am 0 00050mV 1 year 213 days since calibration Standby 0 00000 mv hhp113 eps Push EMES The Calibrator clears the entry from the entry bar toward
53. of a bench or mount in a standard width 24 inch 61 cm deep equipment rack For bench top use the Calibrator has non slipping non marring feet To mount the Calibrator in an equipment rack use the Rack Mount Kit Model Y5737 or the Rack Ear Kit Model Y5738 Instructions are included with the kit AA Warnings To prevent possible electrical shock fire or personal injury do not restrict access to the Calibrator mains power cord The mains power cord is the mains disconnecting device If access to the power cord is inhibited by rack mounting a properly rated accessible mains disconnecting switch must be provided within reach as part of the installation Cooling Considerations ACaution Damage caused by overheating can occur if the area around the air intake is restricted the intake air is too warm or the air filter becomes clogged Adhere to these rules to lengthen the life of the 5730A Calibrator and enhance its performance e The area around the air filter must be at least 3 inches from nearby walls or rack enclosures e The exhaust perforations on the sides of the Calibrator must be clear of obstructions e The air that enters the Calibrator must be room temperature Make sure that exhaust from another instrument is not directed into the fan inlet e Clean the air filter every 30 days or more frequently if the Calibrator is operated in a dusty environment Instructions for cleaning the air filter are in Chapter 7
54. output mV 290 5 105 2 62 0 7 97 1 2 175 3 1050 20 5300 50 9500 100 300 5 110 2 65 0 7 100 1 2 180 3 1100 20 5400 50 10 000 100 250 5 100 5 60 5 85 5 200 6 350 12 800 25 2700 25 250 5 100 5 60 5 85 5 200 6 350 12 800 25 2700 25 250 15 100 8 60 8 85 8 200 20 350 25 800 30 2600 60 250 50 95 20 30 10 70 12 100 40 270 100 900 250 1200 400 250 500 95 200 30 70 70 120 100 250 270 800 900 2500 1300 4000 600 20 4500 50 4700 50 4 mV 15 50 300 20 320 20 340 20 360 20 300 20 50 1k 70 4 75 4 80 4 85 4 50 4 Relative Accuracy 1 C 180 Days 1 Year 24Hours 90 Days 270 5 105 5 65 5 95 5 220 6 400 12 1000 25 3000 25 270 5 105 5 65 5 95 5 220 6 400 12 1000 25 3000 25 270 15 105 4 8 6548 9548 220 20 400 25 1000 30 2800 60 270 50 100 20 40 10 75 12 105 40 290 100 1000 250 1300 400 270 500 100 200 40 70 75 120 105 250 290 800 1000 2500 1400 4000 270 5 100 2 50 0 7 80 1 2 150 3 700 20 8500 100 320 20 55 4 Introduction and Specifications Electrical Specifications 1 5725A Amplifier 40 1k 75 4 80 4 85 4 90 4 50 4 55 4 1k 20k 105 6 125 6 135 6 165 6 85 6 105 6 20 k 30k 230 11 360 11 440 11 600 11 160 11 320 11
55. override the message and run dc zeros at a more convenient time touch Cancel To run dc zero at this time touch OK Note If this message shows after powering on the Calibrator let the Calibrator warm up before running dc zeros Otherwise an error message shows that indicates that the Calibrator is not warmed up To ensure the best performance the warmup should be completed Calibration This section provides procedures to calibrate the Calibrator to external standards adjust the range if necessary and for do a calibration check In order to maintain traceability these requirements must be met e Calibration to external standards must be completed at the start of the calibration cycle e Performance verification must be completed every two years Calibration Check and range calibration are optional procedures that are provided to enhance the accuracy if needed for special requirements See Calibration Check 7 9 5730A Operators Manual Calibration Security Passcode The integrity of Calibrator calibration is protected by a security passcode that must be entered before new calibration constants can be saved to non volatile memory This passcode replaces the hardware calibration switches found on older calibrators such as the Fluke 5720A As with the 5720A the passcode also protects the ability to set the date for the internal real time clock If the passcode has not been entered the Calibrator is secured Once the p
56. power is turned off For remote control applications the same feature is accessible through the remote command Transfer Off Send the command Transfer On to restore internal ac transfers to normal operation To turn off internal ac transfers 1 Touch Setup Menu gt Instrument Setup gt Sourcing Hardware gt A Cxfer Choice until Enable is shown This causes the AC Transfers selection to be shown on the main screen 2 After you set the output for an ac voltage touch the sign to show the ACxfer selection 3 Touch ACxfer it until it says OFF Uncertainty Information Menu From the Instrument Setup menu touch Uncertainty Information to open the menu shown below This menu shows options to configure the specification confidence level and to set the calibration interval Uncertainty Information Calibration Interval Confidence Level hhp107 eps The function of each selection is described below e Calibration Interval sets the calibration cycle to 24 hours 90 days 180 days or 1 year e Confidence Level sets the calibration specification confidence level to 95 96 or 99 All specifications are provided in Chapter 1 of this manual 4 53 5730A Operators Manual Set Output Limits An output limit feature is available to help prevent accidental damage to a UUT from overcurrent or overvoltage conditions The maximum positive and negative allowable voltage or current output can be preset with this feature En
57. range 230 Hz 1 0 05 kHz 30 Hz 3 Introduction and Specifications Electrical Specifications 1 Input Voltage cae 1 V to 10 V rms sine wave do not exceed 1 V for mV ranges Frequency Range ssssssee 10 Hz to 1 1999 MHz Lock Rang amp er terere tc 2 of frequency Lock In Time eere ntn Larger of 10 frequency or 10 msec Phase Reference Selectable Rear Panel BNC Output Rae E 180 Phase Accuracy except 1100 V range 1 at quadrature points 0 90 180 elsewhere 2 Sta Dili reren tereti avis ec Ep 0 1 iatis 1 Output Level etre ide nes 2 5 V rms 0 2 V Frequency Range sssssseeee 50 kHz to 1 kHz usable 10 Hz to 1 1999 MHz 2 2 x 10 V Hz Voltage 100 kHz Frequency 10Hz 50Hz Figure A 1MHz 30 MHz ahp160f eps 1 23 5730A Operators Manual Resistance Specifications 5730A Resistance Specifications Absolute Accuracy of Characterized Value 5 C from calibration l Nominal Value temperature Relative Accuracy 1 C Q 24 Hours 90 Days 180 Days 1 Year 24 Hours 90 Days ppm 99 Confidence Level 50 uQ 50 uQ 50 uQ 50 uQ 50 uQ 50 uQ 1 85 95 100 110 32 40 1 9 85 95 100 110 25 33 10 23 25 26 27 5 8 19 23 25 26 27 4 7 100 10 11 11 5 12 2 4 190 10 11 11 5 12 2 4 1k 7 7 2 7 5 8 2 3 1 9k 7 7 2 7 5 8 2 3 10k 6
58. spade lugs Low Thermal Leads for all connections Both the Calibrator and the recommended external standards have the ability to internally control or compensate for ambient temperature variations Therefore it is unnecessary to keep the Calibrator in tightly controlled temperatures during calibration During the calibration procedure the Calibrator prompts for the ambient temperature and includes this information in specification readouts and output shift reports Note 5440A 7002 and 5440A 7003 Low Thermal Lead sets include a third cable specifically designed for completing Artifact Calibration The 5730A 7002 and 5730A 7003 Low Thermal Lead sets do not include the third cable for connection between reference standards Operator Maintenance and Calibration T Calibration When to Adjust Calibrator Accuracy Table 7 3 lists each external uncertainty limit of the standards and the Calibrator accuracy specifications that must be adjusted accordingly if that limit is exceeded As long as the external standards have the uncertainties listed in Table 7 3 when performing artifact calibration it is not necessary to adjust the Calibrator absolute accuracy specifications in Chapter 1 However if uncertainty of the in house standard exceeds the value in the table some of the absolute accuracy specifications of the Calibrator must be adjusted by the algebraic difference between the standard uncertainty and the uncertainty limit listed in th
59. sssssss MIL PRF 28800F Class 3 Safety ccu rep ee tien nds EN IEC 61010 1 300 V CAT II Pollution Degree 2 Electromagnetic Environment IEC 61326 1 Industrial Electromagnetic Compatibility FCC Rules part 15 sub part B Applies to use in Korea only Class A Equipment Industrial Broadcasting amp Communication Equipment 1 This product meets requirements for industrial Class A electromagnetic wave equipment and the seller or user should take notice of it This equipment is intended for use in business environments and is not to be used in homes Indoor use only sessseee IP20 52120A Electrical Performance Limits Voltage compliance developed across inductive loads may prevent range maximum current output being achieved at higher frequencies The appropriate maximum frequency Fmax for a given load inductance and current is given by 4 5 I Current Fmax 2eTteleL L Total inductance The maximum frequency calculated with this equation is only approximate Series resistance and parallel capacitance also affect the maximum achievable frequency Input common mode rejection 80 dB DC decreasing linearly to 40 dB at 10 kHz Input Impedance Voltage input icto tenne tn ettuna Dn gt 1 MQ Current Input eie deta ess 100 Maximum output compliance voltage 4 5 V rms 6 4 V pk 6 4 V dc 120 A range maximum complian
60. the Calibrator Table 1 1 Symbols A Risk of Danger Important information Hazardous voltage Risk of electric See Manual shock This product complies with the WEEE Directive 2002 96 EC marking requirements The affixed label indicates that you must not discard this electrical electronic product in domestic household waste Product Category With reference to the equipment types in the WEEE Directive Annex I this product is classed as category 9 Monitoring and Control Instrumentation product Do not dispose of this product as unsorted municipal waste Go to Fluke s website for recycling information G Conforms to relevant North American Conforms to relevant Australian EMC iis Safety Standards N10140 standards Conforms to European Union directives Introduction and Specifications How to Contact Fluke Calibration 1 How to Contact Fluke Calibration To contact Fluke Calibration call one of the following telephone numbers Technical Support USA 1 877 355 3225 Calibration Repair USA 1 877 355 3225 Canada 1 800 36 FLUKE 1 800 363 5853 Europe 31 40 2675 200 Japan 81 3 6714 3114 Singapore 65 6799 5566 China 86 400 8 10 3435 Brazil 55 11 3759 7600 Anywhere in the world 1 425 446 6110 To see product information or download manuals and the latest manual supplements visit Fluke Calibration s website at www flukecal com To register your product visit http flukecal com register pr
61. the Setup Menu is not shown push first The display changes to Sourcing Hardware Boost Amp Types hhp111 eps 2 Touch Current to scroll the highlighted label until it shows 5725 or 52120 3 To go to normal operation touch Exit Error Reference When the output value is edited the display shows the difference between the reference value the value originally entered and the edit value the value shown on the display displaying error difference in parts per million ppm or percent 46 For example an edited difference of 0 00030 volts for an output of 10 00000 V represents 0 00030 10 00000 0 000030 or 30 parts per million The sign is negative 30 0 ppm because the output necessary to display 10 00000 at the UUT shows the UUT is reading below the output value When the reference is negative the error sign is relative to the magnitude For example if the reference is 10 00000 V and the display is 10 00030 the error is 30 ppm or 0 0030 The 5730A Calibrator has two methods of scaling the UUT error The first method called the nominal method is used in the Fluke Calibration 5700A 5720A 5502A and 5522A calibrators 4 55 5730A Operators Manual 4 56 The second method is called true value Both methods can be used in this Calibrator The nominal method of error calculation uses the formula reference value edit value reference value The nominal method is useful to check
62. the bottom and shows in the larger area above No voltage is available at the output terminals until is pushed Push Ezzzu3 to activate the Calibrator output The UUT will respond to the applied voltage In de voltage output mode the selections available at the bottom are e External Sense e External Guard e Wideband e Setup Menu In addition the Offset and Scale functions are available The output range can be locked in dc volts 4 17 5730A Operators Manual AC Voltage Output To set an ac voltage output 1 P ND t 4 18 Make sure the Calibrator is in standby STANDBY annunciator lit Push if necessary If the UUT is not connected connect it now as described in this chapter under Connect the Calibrator to a UUT Set the UUT to measure ac voltage on the appropriate range Enter the necessary voltage output in volts or dBm with the numeric keypad Note In the ac voltage function dBm means decibels relative to 1 mW calculated for a 600 Q load The formula to calculate dBm is 10 log power in mW For example if 3 0V is supplied to a 60042 load the dBm level is 10 log 15 0 mW 11 7609 dBm If the Calibrator is switched to Wideband AC output but dBm is kept as the displayed units the dBm value changes The value changes because dBm is calculated for a 50 Qload in the Wideband AC output function With the use of the same voltage level as in the previous example if the Calibrator is switched t
63. the display above the bottom row of selections After a scale factor is established the correct proportion of it is applied to all subsequent entries to compensate for a UUT scale error Touch Scale again to turn off this scale Both the scale error and the keypad entered value are shown on the display with the true output value The Scale selection can be used to establish a reference full scale endpoint This endpoint can be used with the Offset selection to check the linearity of a UUT See the example under Linearity Checking With Offset and Scale To program a scale factor 1 Set the 5730A Calibrator to output a level just below the UUT full scale endpoint For example use 19 9 V for a UUT that ranges at 20 V 2 Adjust the Calibrator output with the rotary knob and arrow keys if necessary until the UUT reads the selected correct output level 19 9 V in this example 3 Touch Scale This stores a scale factor that would apply this adjustment if this output level were selected again Subsequent Calibrator output values will be scaled by this factor In the example in Figure 4 8 the meter reading was 3 mV low at 19 9 V To compensate the Calibrator was adjusted to 19 003 V to get a reading of 19 9 V on the meter Note that the Calibrator is adjusted in the opposite direction of the meter scale error So a factor computed in the subsequent equation is applied to subsequent Calibrator output settings until the Scale selection i
64. the parameter tell the Calibrator which calibration procedure to do CAL_TEMP 23 5 CAL REF 10 00013 V WAI CAL REF 10 00013 V WAI CAL REF 9 99987 KOHM WAI CAL REF 1 00026 OHM WAI CAL ADJ CAL SECURE OFF lt passcode gt CAL STORE WAI CAL_SECURE ON Overlapped command ignored if not in remote Starts a calibration of a range This command causes the Calibrator to source the Description calibration magnitude specified by the second parameter for the range specified by the first parameter To calibrate a range the controller must send commands in the same sequence as in the example The range identifier of the range to calibrate from Table 5 4 or the keyword NULL or STORE Parameter Only if parameter 1 is the range mnemonic The calibration magnitude for the Calibrator to source Must be 45 to 95 of the range specified Optional only if parameter 1 is the range mnemonic The frequency of the Calibrator output with optional multiplier and units CAL_TEMP 23 5 CAL_RNG DC2_2V 2V OPER WAI Example INCR enough to null the Calibrator CAL_RNG NULL CAL_RNG STORE Remote Commands and Syntax 6 Commands CAL_RPT Description Parameter Response CAL_RCSV Description Parameter Response CAL_SECURE Description Parameter Example Example CAL_SECURE Table 6 5 Commands cont Sequential command Returns a report for a specified calibration activity see Chapter
65. the second compound command was sent there would have been no fault and the Calibrator would be set to 100 V at 100 Hz Another example is OUT 1V RANGELCK ON followed by OUT 10V RANGELCK OFF In this case when the Calibrator interprets the first half of the second command it causes an error since the previous command locked the range on 2 2 V Any command that affects the state of the output is a coupled command for example order dependent These commands include all the following RST BOOST BTYPE CAL CHK CAL REF CAL STORE CAL ZERO CUR POST DIAG EXTGUARD EXTSENSE FORMAT INCR LIMIT MULT NEWREF OFFSET OPER OUT PHASE PHASELCK PHASESFT RANGELCK RCOMP REMOTE LOCAL LOCKOUT SCALE STBY WBAND CAL RNG Make sure to use appropriate sequences when these commands are used Remote Commands and Syntax 6 Commands Sequential and Overlapped Commands Commands executed immediately as they are encountered in the data stream are called sequential commands Commands that begin execution but are completed some time later are called overlapped commands because they can be overlapped by later commands Headings under each command description in Tables 6 5 and 6 6 define whether the command is sequential or overlapped Because the 5730A Calibrator queues and executes overlapped commands in a multitasking way OPC OPC and WAI are useful to detect completion of overlapped commands See the full descripti
66. this session OPC Sequential command Description Sets bit 0 OPC for Operation Complete in the Event Status Register to 1 when all pending device operations are complete Parameter None Sets bit O OPC for Operation Complete in the Event Status Register to 1 when all Response 3 P pending device operations are complete After sending an OUT command check if the output has settled by sending OPC As Example Soon as the output has settled a pending DPC command sets bit 0 OPC for Operation Complete in the Event Status Register to 1 The command to read the ESR is ESR OPC Sequential command Description Causes program execution to pause until all operations are complete returns a 1 upon completion of these operations See also WAI Integer 1 after all operations are complete If an OUT command had been sent check if the output has settled by sending OPC or Example OPC As soon as the OUT command has completed output settled a pending OPC command places a 1 in the output buffer to be read by the controller Overlapped command ignored if not in remote Description Activates the Calibrator output if in standby OPER is inhibited for outputs 22V and over if there are faults in the fault queue see Fault Queue Parameter None 6 38 Remote Commands and Syntax 6 Commands OPT Table 6 5 Commands cont Sequential command Returns a list of analog modules installed in the
67. time 32 Kernel Datapath1 not specified in AuxInfo 33 Kernel Datapath2 not specified in AuxInfo 34 Kernel Device not specified in AuxInfo 35 Kernel Erase Command not specified in AuxInfo 36 Cannot extract Kernel update data from AuxlInfo 37 Kernel Offset not specified in Auxlnfo 38 Kernel Read Command not specified in AuxInfo 39 Kernel Write Command not specified in AuxInfo 40 Kernel Device failed to close 41 Kernel Device failed to return info about device status 42 Kernel Device failed to open 43 Kernel Device failed to return status error not used 44 Unable to determine the size of the Kernel image file 45 Invalid offset in Kernel image section 46 Unable to extract command from Auxlnfo for FrontPanel Part3 47 Unable to extract command2 from Auxlnfo for FrontPanel Part3 48 Error creating interim directory 49 MD5 hash of downloaded file does not agree with AuxlInfo 50 Error mounting USB device 51 File to be downloaded does not exist on USB device 52 USB device not plugged in 53 Error deleting previous backup file 54 Error renaming installed file to backup 55 Error moving download file to destination directory 56 Remove file operation not specified in AuxInfo 57 Remove file operation failed 58 Error copying file from USB device to interim directory Appendices Fault Codes A 59 File on USB device is older tha
68. to 6000 0 7 96 0 7 96 OAto 120A 300 Hz to 1 kHz 0 to 6000 0 7 96 0 7 96 OAto 120A 1 kHz to 3 kHz 0 to 6000 0 8 96 1 0 96 OAto25A 3 kHz to 6 kHz 0 to 1250 1 5 96 1 0 96 OAto 13A 6 kHz to 10 kHz 0 to 650 5 0 96 1 0 96 Notes 1 The inductance and mutual inductance of the 50 turn coil causes a frequency dependent compliance voltage across the coil Maximum frequency for 120 A input current is approximately 600 Hz Maximum current input decreases to approximately 13 A at 10 kHz 2 Includes coil probe interaction Note The specifications for these coils are at 99 6 confidence level and are the combined accuracy of the coil and a 52120A If the coils are used with other current sources the calibration accuracy of the coils alone is 0 65 99 confidence level from 0 Hz to 10 kHz 1 35 5730A Operators Manual 1 36 Operating Limits Output Current Range 2A 20A 120A Current Output Max 2 Arms 20 Arms 120 Arms Current Input Input Current Max 200 mA rms 200 mA rms 120 mA rms Current gain 10 100 1 000 Voltage Input Input Voltage Max 2V rms 2V rms 1 2 V rms Transconductance 1 Siemen 10 Siemens 100 Siemens 120 A Range Current Frequency Limits Frequency Maximum Output Current Maximum Current Input Maximum Voltage Input DC 100 A 100 mA 1 0V lt 10 Hz 100 A pk 70 Arms 100 mA pk 70 mA rms 1 0 V pk 0 7 V rms 10 Hz to 10 kHz 170 A pk 120 A rms 170 mA pk
69. to the Ethernet Setup menu Touch PORT Use the numeric keypad to enter a new port number Push XU The port number must be between 1024 to 65535 If a mistake is made when the socket port is entered push and go back to step 2 to enter the port number again Note The Network Socket Port Number is stored in non volatile memory 5 9 5730A Operators Manual Configure the LAN Default Gateway The default gateway IP address is the IP address of a gateway router attached to the same network as the device When the 5730A Calibrator detects that a client computer is not on the same network using the network number the data is sent through the gateway to reach the host computer The default for the Calibrator is 0 no gateway and subnetting is not being used To set the LAN Default Gateway address 1 Touch Setup Menu gt Instrument Setup Remote Port gt Ethernet Setup to get to the Ethernet Setup menu 2 Touch Gateway Use the numeric keypad to enter the gateway address and then push EENES If a mistake is made when the gateway address is entered push and go back to step 4 to enter the port number again Set the LAN Subnet Mask If communication between the client computer and the 5730A Calibrator passes through a router or gateway and DHCP is disabled it is necessary to set the subnet mask and default gateway address on both the client computer and the Calibrator Get the correct subnet mask and gateway addres
70. uA 7 150 19k 2 2 3 50 250 uA 5 150 Im Current 100 k 2 2 3 10 100 uA 1 150 produced by Ohmmeter A 190 k 2 2 3 5 100 uA 500 pA 150 1M 2 5 2 5 6 5 20 uA 100 uA 200 1 9 M 3 5 3 10 2 5 10 uA 50 uA 200 10 M 10 5 20 0 5 2 uA 10 uA 300 19 M 20 8 40 0 25 1 uA 5 uA 300 100 M 50 12 100 50 200 nA 1 uA 500 Notes 1 Stability specifications are included in the Absolute Accuracy values in the primary specification tables 2 Temperature coefficient is an adder to Accuracy specifications that does not apply unless operated more than 5 C from calibration temperature or calibrated outside the range 19 C to 24 C Two examples Calibrate at 20 C Temperature coefficient adder is not required unless operated below 15 C or above 25 C Calibrate at 26 C Add 2 C temperature coefficient adder Additional temperature coefficient adder is not required unless operated below 21 C or above 31 C 3 Refer to current derating factors table for loads outside of this range Active two wire compensation may be selected for values less than 100 kQ with either the front panel or the meter input terminals as reference plane Active compensation is limited to 11 mA load and to 2 V burden Two wire compensation can be used only with Q meters that source continuous not pulsed dc current 1 25 5730A Operators Manual Current Derating Factors Value of Derating Factor K for Over or Under Current Nominal Value z
71. use the EXPLAIN command to find out the meaning of the fault code A Description table of fault codes is also included in Appendix A of this manual A zero value is returned if there are no faults so to read the entire contents of the fault queue repeat FAULT until the response is 0 Integer The fault code 6 32 Remote Commands and Syntax 6 Commands Table 6 5 Commands cont FORMAT Sequential command ignored if not in remote Use with extreme care Restores the contents of the non volatile memory to factory Description defaults The non volatile memory holds calibration constants and setup parameters All calibration data is lost permanently The Calibrator security state must be set to OFF or an execution fault occurs ALL Replaces the whole contents with defaults B5725 Replaces 5725A calibration constants with defaults Parameter CAL Replaces all calibration constants with defaults RNG Replaces range calibration constants with defaults SETUP Replaces setup parameters with defaults GWADDR Description Sequential command Ignored if not in remote Sets Ethernet gateway address for LAN P communication when NOT in DHCP mode Gateway address quoted string consisting of 4 decimal values bound between 0 255 Parameter separated by periods GWADDR 129 196 136 1 Example Sets the Etherent gateway address to 129 196 136 1 Table 6 5 Commands cont GWADDR Description Sequential command
72. 0 200 7000 200 7500 200 8000 200 6000 200 7000 200 5725A Amplifier 370 170 400 170 440 170 460 170 300 170 330 170 100 pA 800 380 850 380 900 380 950 380 700 380 800 380 3000 750 3300 750 3500 750 3600 750 2800 750 3200 750 Note Maximum output from the calibrator s terminals is 2 2 A Accuracy specifications for 220 uA and 2 2 mA ranges are increased by a factor of 1 3 plus 2 uA when supplied through 5725A terminals 1 29 5730A Operators Manual 5730A AC Current Specifications 95 Confidence Level Absolute Accuracy 5 C from calibration Relative Accuracy Frequency temperature 1 C Range Resolution uj 24Hours 90Days 180Days Year 24Hours 90 Days ppm output nA 210 16 230 16 240 16 250 16 210 16 230 16 130 10 140 10 150 10 160 10 11010 130 10 220 uA 96 8 99 8 10148 103 8 80 8 90 8 240 12 250 12 270 12 280 12 200 12 230 12 80065 900 65 1000 65 1100 65 700 65 800 65 210 40 230 40 240 40 250 40 210 40 230 40 130435 1440 35 150435 160 435 110435 130435 2 2mA 10 nA 96 35 99 35 101 35 103 35 80 35 90 35 170110 180110 190 110 200110 160 110 170 110 800 650 900 650 1000 650 1100 650 700 650 800 650 210 400 230 400 240 400 250 400 210 400 230 400 130 350 140350 150 350 160350 110 350 130 350 22 mA 100
73. 0 45 40 0 6 40 0 2 100 0 25 100 0 35 100 0 5 100 0 2 400 0 25 400 0 35 400 0 5 400 0 15 500 0 2 500 0 3 500 0 4 500 Amplitude Flatness 1 kHz Reference Settling Frequency Frequency Voltage Range Temperature Time To Harmonic Hz Resolution 23 3 mV Coefficient Full Distortion Hz S ppm C Accuracy dB output floor indicated Seconds 10 30 0 3 0 3 0 3 30 119 99 0 1 0 1 0 1 120 1 1999 k E 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 2k 11 999 k 0 1 0 1 0 1 12 k 119 99 k 0 1 0 1 0 1 120 k 1 1999 M 0 2 3 uV 0 1 3 uV 0 1 3 uV 12M 2M 0 2 3yuV 0 1 3uV 0 1 3puV 2M 11 9M 0 4 3 uV 0 3 3 uV 0 2 3 uV 12M 20M 0 6 3 uV 0 5 3 uV 0 4 3 uV 20 M 30 M 1 5 15 uV 1 5 3 uV 1 3uV Note 1 For output voltages 50 of full range in the 33 mV 110 mV 330 mV 1 1 V and 3 5 V ranges add 0 1 to the amplitude flatness specification Additional Operating Information dBm reference 50 Q Range boundaries are at voltage points dBm levels are approximate Power dBm 10 log 9 1mW 0 22361 V across 50 Q 1 mW or 0 dBm Minimum Output sss 300 uV 57 dBm Frequency Accuracy 0 01 of output Frequency Resolution 11 999 counts to 1 1999 MHz 119 counts to 30 MHz Overload Protection A short circuit on the wideband output will not result in damage After settling time normal operation is restored upon removal 1 32 I
74. 0 kHz See Operated Stand Alone current accuracy table in the 52120A Users Manual Notes Maximum inductance for stability LCOMP OFF is 100 uH Maximum inductance for stability LCOMP ON is 400 uH for 2 A and 20 A ranges 100 uH on the 120 A range 1 tcalis the temperature at which calibration adjustment took place Maximum Distortion and Noise Distortion n Noi Frequency LCOMP OFF LCOMP ON see i530 NMH dBc Current dBc Current 2 Amp Range 16 Hz to 850 Hz 76 42 uA 70 83 uA 60 dB 850 Hz to 6 kHz 52 662 uA 46 1 3 mA 60 dB 6 kHz to 10 kHz P 40 2 6 mA 35 4 7 mA 60 dB 20 Amp Range 16 Hz to 850 Hz 76 418 pA 60 2 6 mA 70 dB 850 Hz to 6 kHz 52 6 6 mA 42 20 9 mA 70 dB 6 kHz to 10 kHz 40 26 4 mA 35 46 9 mA 70 dB 120 Amp Range 16 Hz to 850 Hz 76 2 5 mA 60 15 8 mA 70 dB 850 Hz to 6 kHz 52 39 7 mA 42 125 7 mA 70 dB 6 kHz to 10 kHz 2 40 158 2 ma 35 281 3 mA 70 dB Notes 1 Use dB or Current Whichever is larger 2 Interharmonics only above 6 kHz 1 34 Introduction and Specifications Electrical Specifications 1 52120A COIL 3 KA 25 Turn Coil Number of turns 0 ccccccccceceesessteeeeeeeeeeee Minimum internal jaw dimension to clear wires 26 mm width x 36 mm length Maximum input current 120 A continuous with built in 12 V fan on Maximum voltage
75. 120 Description Sequential command Returns the current state of inductance compensation for p attached 52120As Examble LCOMP_52120 P Returns ON if LCOMP is enabled LIMIT Sequential command ignored if not in remote Sets the maximum permissible output magnitudes negative and positive Both parameters must be present and the units must be none volts or amps The units must not conflict If no units are specified V is assumed Description Positive limit value with optional multiplier and optional unit Negative limit value with optional multiplier and optional unit LIMIT 1 8 A 1 2 A Sets the limit for ac and positive dc current to 1 8 A and negative dc current to 1 2 A Parameter Example LIMIT LN Sequential command Description gt lx Returns the programmed output magnitude limits for voltage and current Float float float float 1 Positive voltage limit value Response 2 Negative voltage limit value 3 Positive current limit value 4 Negative current limit value LIMIT Returns 2 2000000E 02 1 0000000E 02 1 8000000E 00 1 2000000E 00if the programmed voltage range is 100 V to 220 V and the programmed current range is 1 2 A to 1 8 A Example LRN Sequential command Provides the current setting of the Calibrator The response to this command is a string that recreates the state of the subsequent settings when returned to the Calibrator Output value Whether the wideband AC Modul
76. 120 mA rms 1 7 V pk 1 2 V rms Note The 2 A and 20 A ranges operate at full output current from DC to 10 kHz Output Isolation Frequency DC to 850 Hz Maximum Voltage Signal Applied to any Output Current Terminal with respect to Earth 600 V rms 850 V pk limited 2 A rms no transient overvoltages 850 Hz to 3 kHz 100 V rms 142 V pk limited 2 A rms no transient overvoltages 3 kHz to 10 kHz 33 V rms 47 V pk limited 2 A rms no transient overvoltages Introd ction 1 mier ere t ttes Unpack and Inspect the Calibrator Placement and Rack Mounting Cooling Considerations eese Mains Voltage Selection sess Connect to Mains Power eee Connect a 5725A Amplifier se Connect a 52120A Amplifier Chapter 2 Installation 2 1 5730A Operators Manual 2 2 Installation 2 Introduction Introduction AAWarning The Product can supply lethal voltages to the binding posts Read this chapter before you use the Product This chapter has instructions to unpack and install the 5730A Calibrator The procedures for line voltage selection and connection to mains power are provided here Instructions for cable connections other than line power connection can be found in these chapters of the manual e UUT Unit Under
77. 14 Push Ezzzu3 Wideband flatness calibration starts with a 3 V output at 1 kHz Push the SET REF soft key on the 5790A when the 5790A settles to a reading This is the 3 V reference value from which all other frequencies will be compared Touch Continue and the frequency will go to the next value Setup Menu Y Calibration Wideband Flatness Calibration Standby Press OPERATE Adjust with knob then press Continue 3 0000 v 12 00 kHz Reference Error 3 00000 V 0 00ppm a At this point and all subsequent points for this range push OPERATE then adjust the Calibrator output adjustment knob to bring the 5790A error display to 0 and touch Continue on the Calibrator Repeat this step for each frequency through 30 MHz The Calibrator wideband output changes to 1 V at 1 KHz When it has push the CLEAR REF WBND soft key on the 5790A Repeat steps 7 to 10 for the 1 V 300 mV 100 mV 30 mV and 10 mV ranges hhp222 eps Once the calibration procedure completes save or discard the results in the same way as at the end of artifact calibration and wideband gain calibration Touch Save to store the new calibration constants The Calibrator prompts for the security passcode if it has not already been entered Touch Discard to delete the results of the calibration In both cases the calibration screen is shown after the Calibrator saves or deletes the results Operator Maintenance and Calibration C
78. 140 eps 4 44 Front Panel Operation 4 Linearity Check with Offset and Scale The 10 000208 V output setting is calculated by the Calibrator with the subsequent equation 19 9 V 19 903 V 1 1 0001508 19 9 V This is applied to 10 V to yields 10 V x 1 0001508 10 001508 V The 1 3 mV zero offset is then subtracted 10 001508 V 0 0013 V 10 000208 V 8 Use the output adjustment controls to adjust the Calibrator output for a reading of 10 0 V the reference value on the DMM The displays change to 4 18 2013 14 33 4 3 ppm 1 year 213 days since calibration Standby EB I1 3pAVT v Reference Offset Linearity Error 10 000000 V 0 001300 V 40 035296 hhp141 eps The display now shows that the DMM scale error at 19 9 V is 0 0151 and the DMM linearity error at 10 V is 0 0352 4 45 5730A Operators Manual Set up the Calibrator The remaining sections of this chapter explain how to set up the Calibrator Setup Menu The Setup Menu grants access to various operations and changeable Calibrator parameters Once a parameter is set it is saved in memory until it is changed Any changes are saved during power off periods When Setup Menu is touched from the normal operation screen the display shows the Setup Menu DC Zero Remote Port Artifact Calibration Uncertainty Information Calibration Check Output Limits Wideband Gain Calibration Sourcing Hardware Wideband Flatness Calibration Erro
79. 15 AT Hi Res Loop Fault In 10KHZ Range 2716 AT Hi Res Loop Fault In 100KHZ Range 2717 AT Hi Res Loop Fault In 1MHZ Range 2718 Fault In Setting Up AC For Diagnostics 2719 AT 8255 Was Reset 2800 Level Faults Self Diagnostics DAC 2800 A11 8255 Control Word 2801 A11 8255 Port A Wires 2802 A11 8255 Port B Data Bus 2803 A11 82C54 Status Words 2804 A11 DAC Heaters Not Regulated 2805 Calibrator Not Warmed Up 2806 A11 ADC Amp Output Noise 2807 A11 ADC Amp Output Offset 2808 A11 ADC Amp Gain Error 2809 A11 DAC Monitoring Fault 2810 A11 11 V DC Range Fault 2811 A11 11 V DC Range Fault 2812 A11 22 V DC Range Fault 2813 A11 22 V DC Range Fault 2814 A11 6 5 V Buffered Reference Fault 2815 A11 6 5 V Reference Fault 2816 A11 13 V Buffered Reference Fault 2817 A11 13 V Reference Fault 2818 Assembly A11 Missing 2819 A11 8255 Was Reset A 15 5730A Operators Manual A 16 2820 A11 Fine Adjust Channel Fault 2821 A8 A11 11 22 V DC Zero Estimate Fault 2822 A8 A11 11 22 V DC Zero Estimate Fault 2823 A11 Could not Estimate 11 V Or 22 V Gain 2824 A11 Could not Estimate 6 5 V Or 13 V Ref 2825 A11 Could not Est 6 5 V Or 13 V Buf Ref 2826 A11 A D Overload Fault 3100 Level Faults Self Diagnostics High Voltage 3100 A14 8255 Control Word 3101 A14 8255 Port A Fault 3102 A14 8255 Port B Fault 3103 A14 8255 Por
80. 2 5 2542 5 342 5 3 5 2 5 0 8 2 5 1 2 2 5 22V 1uV 2 4 2 5 4 3 4 3 5 4 0 8 4 1 2 4 220V 10 uV 3 40 3 5 40 4 40 5 40 1 6 40 2 40 1100 V 100 uV 4 400 4 5 400 6 400 6 5 400 2 400 2 4 400 Notes DC Zeros calibration required every 30 days DC Voltage Secondary Performance Specifications and Operating Characteristics Temperature Coefficient Adder P Stability 1 C 0 10 C and Linearity 1 C Bandwidth Bandwidth 24 Hours 40 50 C d 10 10 kHz RMS ppm output uV ppm output uV C ppm output uV Lo 0 3 0 3 0 4 0 1 0 15 0 1 0 341 0 3 0 1 0 15 0 4 0 3 2 5 0 15 0 2 3 0 15 2 0 4 5 0 2 0 4 0 15 4 0 5 40 0 345 E 0 15 60 0 5 200 0 5 10 0 15 300 Notes 1 Stability specifications are included in the absolute accuracy values in the primary specification tables 2 Temperature coefficient is an adder to absolute accuracy specifications that does not apply unless operating more than 5 C from calibration temperature Minimum Output ssse O V for all ranges except 100 V for 1100 V range Maximum Load sees 50 mA for 2 2 V through 220 V ranges 20 mA for 1100 V range 50 Q output impedance on 220 mV range all ranges 1000 pF gt 25 Q Load Regulation 00 0 0 eee 0 2 ppm of output 0 1 ppm of range full load to no load Line Regulation 0 1 ppm change 10 of selected
81. 2120A amplifier can e Accept full scale dc or ac inputs of 2 volts or 200 mA from any calibrator signal generator or power supply e Deliver proportional output current in ranges of 2 A 20 A or 120 A at frequencies to 10 kHz e Offer enhanced accuracy to 140 ppm when used in closed loop mode with a 6105A Electrical Power Standard e Operate in parallel with one or two other 52120As to deliver 240 A or 360 A e Source current with compliance voltage of 4 5 V rms or 6 4 V peak e Drive inductive loads to 1 mH e Drive optional current coils to deliver test currents of 3000 A or 6000 A Support Equipment and Services Fluke Calibration supports calibration requirements with precision high quality equipment and a wide range of services Depending on the calibration needs location and capabilities the 5730A Calibrator can be supported independently or with Fluke Calibration services for part or all support needs The subsequent paragraphs describe the support equipment and services offered by Fluke Calibration for the Calibrator For specifications and ordering instructions for this support equipment and other Fluke Calibration instruments refer to the Fluke Calibration catalog or contact a representative at a Fluke Calibration Sales and Service Center See How to Contact Fluke Calibration 5730A Operators Manual 732B Direct Voltage Reference Standard The Fluke Calibration 732B is a rugged easily transported solid state direct v
82. 2630 Illegal Number Of Ohms Cal Points 2631 5725 Shunt 0 A Meas Fail 2632 5725 Shunt 1 3 A Meas Fail 2633 5725 Current Amplifier Zero Meas Fail 2634 5725 Current Amplifier Gain Meas Fail 2635 Wideband Thermal Sensor Cal Diverge 2636 Wideband Sensor Amp Offset Too Big 2637 Wideband Ext Cal Point Bad Const ID 2638 5725 ACV Sense Amp Offset Diverge 2639 5725 ACV Sense Amp Gain Diverge 2640 5725 ACV Flatness Ref Freq Failure 2641 5725 ACV Flatness Cal Freq Failure 2642 External V Reference Value Out Of Range 2643 5725 Diagnostic DAC Cal did not Converge 2645 52120A Source Range Gain Diverge 2646 DAC Appears To Not Meet Linearity Spec 2647 ACV Buffer Offset Too Large 2648 5725 ACV Flat Test Cap Too Large 2649 5725 ACV Flat Test Cap Too Large 2650 Could not Cal 100 M O Meas 2 2651 Invalid Security Passcode 2652 Passcode Be 1 to 8 Digits 2700 Level Faults Self Diagnostics Current 2700 AT 8255 Control Word 2701 AT 8255 Port A Fault 2702 AT 8255 Port B Fault 2703 AT 8255 Port C Fault 2705 AT Oven Regulation Fault Appendices Fault Codes A 2706 AT Current Compliance Fault 2707 AT Hardware Initialization Fault 2709 AT Current Magnitude Fault 2710 AT Dummy Load Current Fault 2711 Assembly A7 Is Not Responding 2712 AT Hi Res Clock Fault 2713 AT Hi Res Loop Fault In 100HZ Range 2714 AT Hi Res Loop Fault In 1KHZ Range 27
83. 5 95 2 57 0 7 90 1 2 160 3 900 20 5000 50 8000 100 270 5 105 5 90 5 230 5 540 6 1200 12 1500 25 3100 25 270 5 105 5 90 5 230 5 540 6 1200 12 1500 25 3100 25 270 15 105 8 66 8 140 8 380 20 700 25 1500 30 2900 60 270 50 100 20 46 10 77 12 97 40 370 100 1100 250 1800 600 270 500 100 200 46 70 77 120 97 250 290 800 270 5 100 2 60 0 7 95 1 2 17043 1000 20 5200 50 9000 100 Absolute Accuracy 5 C from calibration temperature ppm output uV 290 5 110 5 95 5 240 5 570 6 1250 12 1600 25 3250 25 290 5 110 5 95 5 240 5 570 6 1250 12 1600 25 3250 25 290 15 110 8 67 8 145 8 390 20 750 25 1600 30 3100 60 290 50 105 20 47 10 78 12 98 40 380 100 1150 250 1900 400 290 500 105 200 47 70 78 120 98 250 295 800 10 20 20 40 40 20k 20k 50k 50 k 100 k d 100 k 300 k 300 k 500 k 1000 2500 1100 2500 1150 2500 500 k 4 M 300 5 11545 100 5 250 5 600 6 1300 12 1700 25 3400 25 300 5 115 5 100 5 250 5 600 6 1300 12 1700 25 3400 25 300 15 115 8 70 8 150 8 400 20 800 25 1700 30 3300 60 300 50 110 20 48 10 80 12 100 40 400 100 1200 250 2000 400 300 500 110 200 48 70 80 120 100 250 300 800 1200 2500 1800 4000 ppm
84. 52120A 5005 52120A added or removed 5006 52120A forceably turned off 5007 52120A detected over compliance 5008 52120A detected over range 5009 52120A detected over temperature 65535 Unknown A 25 5730A Operators Manual A 26 Appendix B ASCII and IEEE 488 Bus Codes B 1 5730A Operators Manual ASCII BINARY DEV MESSAGE ASCII BINARY DEV MESSAGE CHAR DECIMAL OCTAL HEX 7654 3210 NO ATN TRUE CHAR DECIMAL OCTAL HEX 7654 3210 No ATN TRUE NUL 0 000 00 0000 0000 n SQH 1 001 01 0000 0001 STX 2 002 02 0000 0010 ETX 3 003 03 0000 0011 EOT 4 004 04 0000 0100 E ENQ 5 005 05 0000 0101 S ACH 6 ooe 06 0000 0110 S BELL 7 007 07 0000 0111 E BS 8 000 08 0000 1000 HT 9 011 09 0000 1001 C T LF 10 002 oA 0000 1010 0 A VT 11 013 0B 0000 1011 M L M K FF 12 o14 oc 0000 1100 A CR 13 005 oD 0000 1101 N A SO 14 006 0E 0000 1110 D D SI 15 o7 oF 0000 1111 S D DLE 16 020 10 0001 0000 E DCI 17 021 11 0001 0001 S DC2 18 022 12 0001 0010 N S DC3 19 023 13 0001 0011 i E DC4 20 024 14 0001 0100 E 3 NAK 21 025 15 0001 0101 R SYN 22 026 16 0001 0110 S ETB 23 027 17 0001 0111 8 CAN 24 030 18 0001 1000 EM 25 031 19 0001 1001 C SUB 26 033 1A 0001 1010 0 ESC 27 033 1B 0001 1011 M FS 28 034 1C 0001 1100 A TA GS 29 035 1D 0001 1101 N TA
85. 55 254 0 if the subnet mask was previously set to this value TST Sequential command ignored if not in remote Description Initiates a series of self tests then returns a 0 for pass or a 1 for fail If any faults are detected they are logged into the fault queue where they can be read by the FAULT query Integer 0 for Pass or 1 for Fail UNCERT Sequential command Description Returns the calculated maximum uncertainty of the Calibrator output according to the selected calibration interval Parameter None 1 Float Uncertainty of the Calibrator output 1 0 if no specification is available Response 2 String Units for response 1 PPM PCT V A OHM etc 3 Integer The specification interval in days VOUT ents Sequential command Description Returns the output amplitude expressed in volts if the currently selected units are dBm Parameter None 1 Float Output amplitude Response 2 String V A OHM units for response 1 3 Float Frequency Exams Assuming a value of 10 dBm 10 kHz is currently active on the main output terminals P VOUT returns 2 4494897E 00 V 1 0000E 04 6 47 5730A Operators Manual Table 6 5 Commands cont WAI Sequential command Description Wait to Continue This command prevents further remote commands from being executed until all previous remote commands have been executed See also OPC Parameter None If an OUT command had been
86. 5uA 3 10 uA 12 1 5 pA ppm o ppm output 5725A output pA ppm output pA C uA 25 100 20475 sori 4 9 4 1579 Notes Maximum output from the calibrator s terminals is 2 2 A Accuracy specifications for 220 mA and 2 2 mA ranges are increased by a factor of 1 3 when supplied through 5725A terminals Stability specifications are included in the Absolute Accuracy values for the primary specifications Temperature coefficient is an adder to Accuracy specifications It does not apply unless operating more than 5 C from calibration temperature Burden voltage adder is an adder to Accuracy specifications that does not apply unless burden voltage is greater than 0 5 V 0 1x actual load For higher loads multiply Accuracy specification by 1 maximum load for full accuracy The calibrator s compliance limit is 2 V for outputs from 1 A to 2 2 A 5725A Amplifier may be used in range lock mode down to OA Minimum Output i e 0 for all ranges including 5725A Settling Time yenna aa 1 second for mA and mA ranges 3 seconds for 2 2 A range 6 seconds for 11 range 1 second for range or polarity change Overshoot enini emendi 5 96 1 28 Introduction and Specifications 1 Electrical Specifications AC Current Specifications 5730A AC Current Specifications 99 Confidence Level Absolute Accuracy 5 C from calibration Relative Accuracy 1
87. 6 for format details CAL Output change report for calibration CHECK Output change report for calibration check RAW A list of all calibration constants String lt EOL gt lt formatted report gt Sequential command Returns a report in CSV format for a specified calibration activity see Chapter 6 for format details CAL Output change report for calibration CHECK Output change report for calibration check RAW A list of all calibration constants String lt EOL gt lt formatted report gt Sequential command Ignored if not in remote Lock unlocks the calibration security by use of a passcode The passcode is entered as a quoted string of decimal digits eg 12345 To secure the Calibrator no passcode is necessary If an incorrect password is entered the Calibrator will automatically be resecured if it was unsecured 1 ON OFF 2 lt passcode gt CAL_SECURE OFF 12345 Unsecures the Calibrator CAL_SECURE ON Secures the Calibrator Description Sequential command Returns the current security state of the Calibrator Parameter None Response String Exanipls CAL SECURE Returns ON if the Calibrator is secured 6 23 5730A Operators Manual Table 6 5 Commands cont CAL_SHIFT Returns a particular set of output shifts from a particular range CAL Output changes due to calibration check Parameter CHECK All output changes due to calibration check Range identifie
88. 7 7 5 8 2 3 19k 6 7 7 5 8 2 3 100 k 7 8 9 10 2 3 190 k 8 10 11 12 2 3 1M 13 14 14 5 15 2 5 5 1 9M 15 17 19 21 3 6 10M 33 37 40 46 10 14 19M 43 47 50 55 20 24 100 M 100 110 115 120 50 60 95 96 Confidence Level 40 uQ 40 uQ 40 uQ 40 uQ 40 uQ 40 uQ 1 70 80 85 95 27 35 1 9 70 80 85 95 20 26 10 20 21 22 23 4 7 19 20 21 22 23 3 5 6 100 8 9 9 5 10 1 6 3 5 190 8 9 9 5 10 1 6 3 5 1k 5 5 5 7 6 6 5 1 6 2 5 1 9k 5 5 5 7 6 6 5 1 6 2 5 10k 5 5 5 6 6 5 1 6 2 5 19k 5 5 5 6 6 5 1 6 2 5 100 k 5 5 7 5 8 8 5 1 6 2 5 190 k 6 7 8 8 5 1 6 2 5 1M 10 11 12 13 2 4 1 9M 12 13 5 15 18 2 5 4 10M 27 31 34 40 8 12 19M 35 39 42 47 16 20 100 M 85 95 100 100 40 50 Note 1 Specifications apply to displayed value 4 wire connections except 100 MQ 1 24 Introduction and Specifications 1 Electrical Specifications Resistance Secondary Performance Specifications and Operating Characteristics Maximum Two Wire Temperature Coefficient Difference of Adder Active Stability Adder P Maximum Characterized Compensation Nominal 41 oc Full Spec Load Peak to Nominal 2 B Value 24 Hours 0 10 C Range Current Value Lead Resistance Q 10 40 C and I Iy mA Imax 40 50 C me ppm one mQ 0 8 500 500 1 32 4 5 8 100 700 500 1 9 25 6 7 8 100 500 500 10 5 2 3 8 11 220 300 19 4 2 3 8 11 160 300 100 2 2 3 8 11 70 150 190 2 2 3 8 11 50 150 1k 2 2 3 1 2 22 150 1 9k 2 2 3 1 1 5 16 150 10k 2 2 3 100 500
89. 750 V 30k 50k 230 11 360 11 440 11 600 11 160 11 320 11 50k 100k 600 45 1300 45 1600 45 2300 45 380 45 1200 45 Notes 1 Maximum output 250 V from 15 50 Hz 2 See Volt Hertz capability in Figure A Error Reference source not found 5730A AC Voltage Specifications 95 Confidence Level Resolution Absolute Accuracy 5 C from calibration Relative Accuracy temperature 1 C 24Hours 90Days 180Days Year 24Hours 90 Days ppm output uV Frequency Hz 10 20 20 40 40 20 k 20 k 50k 50 k 100 k 100 k 300 k 300 k 500 k 500k 1M 10 20 20 40 40 20 k 20 k 50k 50 k 100 k 100 k 300 k 300 k 500 k 500k 1M 10 20 20 40 40 20 k 20 k 50k 50 k 100 k 100 k 300 k 300 k 500 k 500k 1M 10 20 20 40 40 20 k 20 k 50 k 50 k 100 k 100 k 300 k 300 k 500 k 500k 1M 100 nV 10 uV 220 mV 10 20 20 40 40 20k 20k 50k 50k 100k 100k 300k 300k 500k 500k 1M 200 4 80 4 70 4 170 4 400 5 800 10 1100 20 2400 20 200 4 80 4 70 4 170 4 400 5 800 10 1100 20 2400 20 200 12 80 7 54 7 105 7 296 17 535 20 1100 25 2400 45 200 40 75 15 37 8 61 10 79 30 276 80 800 200 1300 300 200 400 75 150 37 50 61 100 78 200 238 600 800 2000 1200 3200 220 4 85 4 75 4 180 4 460 5 900 10 1200 20 2500 20 220 4 85 4 75
90. 8 3548 55 10 60 10 80 30 85 30 230 80 250 80 700 200 800 200 1000 300 1100 300 200 400 220 400 75 150 80 150 25 50 35 50 55 100 60 100 80 200 85 200 250 600 270 600 700 2000 800 2000 1200 3200 220 4 85 4 55 4 80 4 180 5 ppm output mV 5730A Operators Manual 10 20 200 4 220 4 230 4 240 4 200 4 220 4 20 40 75 1 5 80 1 5 8541 5 90 1 5 7541 5 80 1 5 40 20k 45 0 6 47 0 6 50 0 6 52 0 6 35 0 6 40 0 6 20k 50k 70 41 75 1 7741 80 1 60 1 65 1 220V 100 uv 50k 100k 12042 5 130 2 5 140 2 5 150 2 5 110 2 5 120 2 5 100k 300k 700 16 800 16 850 16 900 16 500 16 600 16 300 k 500k 4000 40 4200 40 4300 40 4400 40 3600 40 3800 40 500k 1M 6000 80 7000 80 7500 80 8000 80 6500 80 7000 80 50 1k 55 3 5 60 3 5 65 3 5 70 3 5 40 3 5 45 3 5 40 1k 75 4 80 4 85 4 90 4 50 4 55 4 1k 20k 105 6 125 6 135 6 165 6 85 6 105 6 20 k 30k 230 11 360 11 440 11 600 11 160 11 320 11 30 k 50 k 230 11 360 11 440 11 600 11 160 11 320 11 50k 100k 600 45 1300 45 1600 45 2300 45 380 45 1200 45 750V Notes 1 Maximum output 250 V from 15 50 Hz 2 See Volt Hertz capability in Figure A AC Voltage Secondary Performance Specifications and Operating Characteristics Maximum Stability 1 C 5 Oumhdbed Distortion Frequency 24 Hours 10 40
91. 827 14 Bit DAC Scaling Found Zero Output 1900 Level Faults Non volatile 1900 Repaired Missing Or Corrupted NV Files 1903 Unknown Nonvolatile Constant Selector 1905 Could Not Write Byte To 5725 EEPROM 1906 Checksum Error Reading 5725 EEPROM Appendices Fault Codes A 2000 Level Faults Analog Operations Manager 2000 Bad Command Code 2001 Bad Signal 2002 Long Term Command In Progress 2003 Guard Crossing Protocol Failed To Start 2004 Fatal Fault Output Tripped 2200 Level Faults Remote Interface 2200 Unknown Command 2201 Invalid Number Of Parameters 2202 Invalid Cal Constant Name 2203 Invalid Keyword 2204 Invalid Range 2205 Invalid Parameter Type 2206 Invalid Parameter Unit 2207 Invalid Parameter Value 2208 IEEE488 2 I O DEADLOCK 2210 IEEE488 2 INTERRUPTED Query 2211 Not Allowed From GPIB Interface 2212 Not Allowed From Serial Interface 2213 Remote Only 2214 Invalid Syntax 2215 IEEE488 2 UNTERMINATED Command 2216 Symbol Table Overflow 2218 Invalid Binary Number 2219 Invalid Binary Block 2220 Invalid Character 2221 Invalid Decimal Number 2222 Invalid Hexadecimal Block 2223 Invalid Hexadecimal Number 2224 Too Many Parameters 2225 Invalid Octal Number 2226 Too Many Characters 2227 Invalid String 2228 Invalid Register Address 5730A Operators Manual A 10
92. A 5720A Series II remote programs can be used to operate the 5730A AA Warning The Product can produce voltages up to 1100V rms and must be programmed with caution to prevent hazardous voltages from being produced without sufficient warning to the operator Programs should be written carefully and tested extensively to ensure safe operation of the Product Fluke Calibration recommends to include error catching routines in your programs to ensure that the Product performs as intended By setting the Service Request Enable register SRE described in Chapter 6 the Product can be programmed to cause an SRQ when an error is detected GPIB IEEE 488 Interface Use the IEEE 488 Port for Remote Control The 5730A Calibrator is fully programmable for use on the IEEE Standard 488 1 interface bus IEEE 488 bus The interface is also designed in compliance with supplemental standard IEEE 488 2 Devices connected to the bus in a system are designated as talkers listeners talker listeners or controllers Under the remote control of an instrument controller the Calibrator operates exclusively as a talker listener on the IEEE 488 bus IEEE 488 Bus Restrictions The subsequent restrictions apply to all IEEE 488 systems 1 A maximum of 15 devices can be connected in a single IEEE 488 bus system 2 The maximum length of IEEE 488 cable used in one IEEE 488 system is either 2 m 6 56 ft times the number of devices in the system or 20 m 65 61
93. A shows the four wire connection For calibrating a meter with a two wire resistance mode such as a typical handheld digital multimeter DMM refer to Figures 4 4B through 4 4D For resistances of 19 kQ or lower in two wire mode compensation circuitry inside the Calibrator is available to remove errors introduced by resistance in the path between the front panel terminals and the precision resistor The 2 wire Compensation item is shown at the bottom of the display when resistances of 19 kQ or lower are selected This selection lets the compensation circuitry be disabled and enabled Depending on how the meter is connected two wire compensation referenced at the UUT terminals Figure 4 4C or at the Calibrator terminals Figure 4 4D can be used Figure 4 4B shows a meter connected in a two wire connection with the two wire compensation circuitry turned off Use this configuration only if lead resistances are insignificant For a two wire connection turn External Sense off For resistances where uncompensated lead resistances are significant use the two wire compensation circuit and the connection in Figure 4 4C or 4 4D Use the connection in Figure 4 4C to calibrate the meter referenced at its terminals Use the connection in Figure 4 4D to calibrate the meter referenced at the ends of its test leads Front Panel Operation 4 Set the Output Wideband AC Voltage Output Option 5700A 03 To set an output from the Wideband AC Module Op
94. August 2013 2013 Fluke Corporation All rights reserved Specifications are subject to change without notice All product names are trademarks of their respective companies Calibration 5730A Multifunction Calibrator Operators Manual LIMITED WARRANTY AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY Each Fluke product is warranted to be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service The warranty period is one year and begins on the date of shipment Parts product repairs and services are warranted for 90 days This warranty extends only to the original buyer or end user customer of a Fluke authorized reseller and does not apply to fuses disposable batteries or to any product which in Fluke s opinion has been misused altered neglected contaminated or damaged by accident or abnormal conditions of operation or handling Fluke warrants that software will operate substantially in accordance with its functional specifications for 90 days and that it has been properly recorded on non defective media Fluke does not warrant that software will be error free or operate without interruption Fluke authorized resellers shall extend this warranty on new and unused products to end user customers only but have no authority to extend a greater or different warranty on behalf of Fluke Warranty support is available only if product is purchased through a Fluke authorized sales outlet or Buyer has paid the applicable international pri
95. BRIGHTNESS Returns the brightness setting BTYPE Sequential command ignored if not in remote Selects the accessory amplifiers for current and voltage boost If the BOOST command Description is active when BTYPE is received BTYPE does not take effect until the next time the BOOST command is received The setting of BTYPE remains even after the power is turned off One of the subsequent VB5725 Selects the 5725A for voltage boost 1B5725 Selects the 5725A for current boost 1B52120 Selects the 52120A for current boost E BTYPE IB5725 Lampe Selects Model 5725A as the current amplifier Parameter BTYPE Sequential command Description Returns the model numbers of auxiliary amplifiers selected for voltage and current boost Returns IB52120 if Model 52120A is selected for current boost Response String string VB lt model number gt IB lt model number gt VBNONE is also available to Response prevent the Calibrator from automatically switching to a connected 5725A BTYPE Example Returns VB5725 1B5725 if Model 5725A is selected for voltage boost and Model 5725A is selected for current boost CAL ADJ Overlapped long term command ignored if not in remote Description Does the internal calibration This command should be sent after the last CAL REF command in the sequence of calibration See CAL REF for an example CAL CHK Overlapped long term command ignored if not in remote Description Starts calibr
96. C 0 10 C and utput Impedance Bandwidth 10 Hz Hz 40 50 C 10 MHz output uV 10 20 20 40 40 20k 20k 50k 50 k 100 k 100 k 300 k 300 k 500 k 500 k 1M 10 20 20 40 40 20k 20k 50k 50 k 100 k 100 k 300 k 300 k 500 k 0 05 11 0 035 11 0 035 11 0 035 11 0 035 30 0 3 30 0 3 30 2 30 ppm output uV Hppmoutputuv C 150 20 0 05 16 80 15 0 035 16 12 2 0 035 16 10 2 0 035 16 10 2 0 035 30 100 k 300 k 20 4 0 3 30 300 k 500 k 100 10 0 3 30 500 k 1M 200 20 1 30 EE 5 CNN NN ppm output uV 10 20 150 20 50 10 50 10 10 2 0 05 80 20 40 80 15 15 5 15 5 10 2 0 035 80 40 20k 12 4 2 1 5 2 10 4 0 035 80 20k 50k 15 5 10 2 15 4 30 10 0 035 80 50 k 100 k 15 5 10 4 20 4 120 16 0 035 110 100 k 300 k 30 10 80 15 80 15 300 ppm 0 3 110 300 k 500 k 70 20 80 40 80 40 600 ppm 0 5 110 500 k 1M 150 50 80 100 80 100 1200 ppm 1 110 10 20 150 20 50 100 50 100 10 20 0 05 700 20 40 80 15 15 30 15 40 10 20 0 035 700 40 20k 12 8 2 10 4 15 10 30 0 035 700 20 k 50 k 15 10 10 20 20 20 30 50 0 035 700 50 k 100 k 15 10 10 40 20 40 80 80 0 05 800 100 k 300 k 30 15 80 150 80 150 100 700 0 3 800 toe I Te SUNY a a C NN Ore e 1 20 Introduction and Specifications 1 Electrical Specifications 500k 1M 150 100 80 500 80 500 600 3000 2 800 10 20 150 200
97. Calibrator including any auxiliary amplifiers that are attached Series of strings A list of the modules and auxiliary amplifiers separated by commas 5725A Attached 52120 Attached 0 UT OUT Overlapped command ignored if not in remote Sets the output of the Calibrator and establishes a new reference point for shifting the output to determine UUT error If only one parameter is supplied the Calibrator makes the minimum change needed to comply with the requested output For example if the Calibrator setting is 1 V 100 Hz and OUT 2V is sent the setting changes to 2 V 100 Hz Optional Output amplitude with optional multiplier and unit At least one parameter must be sent Optional Output frequency with optional multiplier and unit At least one parameter must be sent OUT 15 2 V 15 2 V frequency unchanged OUT 188 3 MA 442 HZ 188 3 mA 442 Hz OUT 1 9 MOHM 1 9 MQ OUT 100 HZ Sets the frequency only Sequential command Returns the Calibrator output amplitude and frequency does not include multipliers Parameter None OUT_ERR 1 Float Output amplitude 2 String Units V DBM A or OHM 3 Float Frequency 0 if dc or ohms 1 256983E 01 V 0 12 56983 V 1 883E 01 A 4 42E 02 188 3 mA 442 Hz 1 9E 06 0HM 0 1 9 MQ Sequential command Returns the UUT error computed by the Calibrator after the INCR command is used to shift the output Parameter None Response Descrip
98. Calibrator display always shows the actual output of the amplifier not the excitation output of the Calibrator In general for the 5725A the amplifier is activated automatically by selecting an output amplitude only available in its range For the 52120A and in some cases with the 5725A and 52120A the Boost selection is used to activate and deactivate the selected amplifier Refer to the subsequent text for specific operation instructions for each type of amplifier 4 31 5730A Operators Manual 4 32 5725A Amplifier Output AA Warning Boosted voltage operation produces high voltage at higher current levels than normally available from the Product During boosted voltage operation the potential risk of injury or fatal accident is greater than during normal operation Note Refer to the 5725A Instruction Manual for setup and installation instructions The 5725A Amplifier boosts ac voltage and both ac and dc current To set a boosted output from the 5725A Amplifier 1 9 If not already installed install the 5725A as described in the 5725A Instruction Manual If the Boost Amp Types setting in the Setup Menu has been changed from the default select the 5725A for boost operation as described at the beginning of this chapter Make sure the Calibrator and 5725A are in standby STANDBY annunciator lit Push if necessary If the UUT is not connected connect it now as described earlier in this chapter under C
99. Connect the Calibrator to a UUT Connect the Calibrator to a UUT AAWarning The Product can supply lethal voltages Do not make connections to the output terminals when any voltage is present Placing the Product in standby may not be enough to prevent shock hazard since Gaz could be pushed accidentally Push and make sure that standby is illuminated before making connections to the output terminals The binding posts labeled OUTPUT HI OUTPUT LO and AUX CURRENT OUTPUT deliver voltage fixed resistance and current to the UUT Unit Under Test The Type N connector on the front panel labeled WIDEBAND delivers the output signal from the optional 5700A 03 Wideband AC Module Depending on the output function output amplitude and input configuration of the UUT or meter connection to the SENSE binding posts the GUARD binding post and the GROUND binding post may also be necessary or recommended The text in this chapter explains how and when to use these binding posts Recommended Cable and Connector Types Cables can be connected to the binding posts with banana jacks terminal lugs or stripped insulated wire To avoid errors induced by thermal voltages thermal emfs use connectors and conductors made of copper or materials that generate small thermal emfs when joined to copper Avoid the use of nickel plated connectors Optimum results can be obtained with the 5730A 7003 Low Thermal EMF Test Leads Cable requirements depend o
100. D parameter 1 An eighth bit DIOS is ignored 2 All data is taken as 7 bit ASCII 3 Lower case or upper case characters are accepted 4 ASCII characters whose decimal equivalent is less than 32 Space are discarded except for characters 10 LF and 13 CR and in the PUD command argument PUD allows all characters in its argument and terminates in a special way Remote Commands and Syntax 6 Input Buffer Operation Response Message Syntax In Table 6 5 responses from the 5730A Calibrator are described wherever appropriate In order to know whether to read in an integer a floating point number or character string the first entry is Integer Floating or String Note The responses described in the command tables are correct for IEEE 486 remote control and for serial Ethernet USB remote control in COMPUTER mode TERMINAL mode in serial Ethernet USB remote control responses contain more descriptive text intended for an operator using a terminal interactively Integers for most controllers or computers are decimal numbers in the range 32768 to 32767 Response elements of this type are labeled as integer in the command tables Floating point numbers may be in exponential form for example 1 15E 12 String responses may be any ASCII printing characters A special case of string response is in the CAL CLST CAL SHIFT CAL SLST CAL RPT ECHO EXPLAIN RPT STR OPT and STATE commands Those st
101. ER do verte Ret Ei dius 4 34 Enter Error Mode ire t aote nt ote ettet te en ot 4 34 Exit Eror Mode oaa mne tau aded ores 4 34 Use Btrot MOde sieci iriiritia eiiie eee tope t DU RES 4 35 Read the UUT Error AC and DC Voltage and Current Output 4 35 Read the UUT Error Resistance Output eese 4 36 Introduction to Offset Scale and Linearity Errors 4 36 ORISet BFrEOE 4 uini cite ee HE PER Th Et oerte duelo oie eoe d ine 4 37 Scale Error 5d tait mete ata interdite rere ses oa 4 37 Linearity Errors 4 275 e et eee te oet e ee nt edt ooh tes 4 38 Combine the Brror Lypes ioa eoe ee eq eene 4 39 Programan Offset itesnispita eene tO eese rre IO e Mee ha ite ptt ed 4 40 Program ia Scale Factors orao rere e eH ERE RA Ee deuwes 4 41 5730A Operators Manual 4 2 Linearity Check with Offset and Scale esee 4 42 Setup the Calibrator sss eee eter e piene 4 46 Setup Menu e Ue ern ed eene a ete titel 4 46 Setup Menu Rules 2e tete p re THER ete Poet a a 4 47 Menu D scriptioli inpet cete eene Rue eere artnet 4 48 Touchscreen Selections teet eerte t incen eene 4 48 Instrument Setup eee redde nineteen deed ge cee 4 52 Uncertainty Information Menu esee 4 53 Set Output Limits zu ue eee 4 54 select Boost Amplifiers edere rte eerie dne 4 55 Error R f rence e eene e eniti 4 55 Instrument Set n5s i cse tette eret e e Re rota 4 57 Set the In
102. LOCK When 1 the Calibrator output range is locked RCOMP When 1 two wired compensation is active when in resistance mode BOOST When 1 an auxiliary amplifier is active EXSENS When 1 external sensing is selected EXGARD When 1 external voltage guard is selected OPER When 1 the Calibrator is operating When 0 it is in standby Read the ISR ISCR or ISCE To read the contents of the ISR send the remote command ISR In a similar fashion to read the contents of the ISCR send ISCR and to read the contents of the ISCE send ISCE The Calibrator returns a decimal number representing bits 0 through 15 Each time the ISCR is read its contents are zeroed Load the ISCE By resetting the bits in the ISCE the associated bits in the ISCR can be masked disabled For example to cause an SRQ interrupt when an attached 5725A Amplifier turns on bit 3 BOOST in the ISCE register must be 1 The ISCB bit must also be enabled in the SRE Fault Queue When a command fault execution fault or device dependent fault occurs its fault code is placed in the fault queue where it can be read by the FAULT command All fault codes are defined in Appendix A of this manual Another way to decode a fault code is to send the command EXPLAIN which returns a description of a fault code Reading the first fault with the FAULT command removes that fault from the queue A response of 0 means the fault queue is empty The fault queue contains up to
103. Line Power Label and Switch Location Connect to Mains Power AAWarning To prevent shock hazard connect the factory supplied three conductor mains power cord to a properly grounded power outlet Do not use a two conductor adapter or extension cord as it will break the protective ground connection If a two conductor mains power cord must be used a protective grounding wire must be connected between the ground terminal and earth ground before you connect the mains power cord or operate the Product Connect a 5725A Amplifier The 5730A Calibrator provides an interface connector for the Fluke 5725A Amplifier Designate the active amplifier for voltage and current boost in the Setup Menu as detailed in Chapter 4 Refer to the 5725A Instruction Manual for the installation procedure Connect a 52120A Amplifier The 5730A Calibrator provides an interface connector for the Fluke 52120A Transconductance Amplifier Designate the active amplifier for current boost in a Setup Menu as detailed in Chapter 4 Refer to the 52720A Users Manual for the installation procedure 2 6 Chapter 3 Features Title Page INiPOGUC HOM EAE E EENE AAT cote best ael Lin ee bes iesadhe ute MM ee br Ca RE REN eo tus 3 3 Front Panel Beatures d et ER eoe eres teet bred ee es tec ests 3 3 Rear Panel Eeatu res 4 e eere te esee veces re oe teta ooa eee tre eio e a 3 7 3 1 5730A Operators Manual 3 2 Features 3 Introduction Introducti
104. One or more enabled ISCR bits are 1 Service Request Line SRQ Service Request SRQ is an IEEE 488 1 bus control line that the Calibrator asserts to notify the controller that it requires some type of service Many instruments can be on the bus but they all share a single SRQ line To determine which instrument set SRQ the Controller normally does a serial poll of each instrument The Calibrator asserts SRQ whenever the RQS bit in its Serial Poll Status Byte is 1 This bit informs the controller that the Calibrator was the source of the SRQ The Calibrator clears SRQ and RQS when the controller does a serial poll of the Calibrator IEEE 488 interface sends CLS or when the MSS bit is cleared The MSS bit is cleared only when ESB MAV EAV and ISCB are 0 or they are disabled by their associated enable bits in the SRE register being set to 0 Service Request Enable Register The Service Request Enable Register SRE enables or masks the bits of the Serial Poll Status Byte The SRE is cleared at power up Refer to Serial Poll Status Byte for the bit functions Load the SRE By resetting to 0 the bits in the SRE associated bits in the serial poll status byte can masked disabled Bits set to 1 enable the associated bit in the serial poll status byte 6 54 Remote Commands and Syntax 6 Check the Calibrator Status Event Status Register The Event Status Register is a two byte register that the higher eight bits are always 0
105. Operation 4 Linearity Check with Offset and Scale Note The message Error gt 999 9999 occurs because in this case the reference voltage is 0 3 Touch Offset to identify this as the DMM zero scale endpoint The display changes to 12 21 12 10 52am 3 1 year 213 days since calibration Standby 1 3000 mv Reference Offset 0 00000 mV 1 30000 mV hhp137 eps 4 Use the numeric keypad to set the Calibrator to a point near the end of the DMM range This example uses 19 9 V The displays change to 4 18 2013 14 33 4 3 ppm 1 year 213 days since calibration Standby 19 898700 v Reference Offset 19 9V 0 001300 V hhp138 eps 4 43 5730A Operators Manual 5 Use the output adjustment controls to adjust the Calibrator output for a reading of 19 9 V the reference value on the DMM The displays change to 4 18 2013 14 33 4 3 ppm 1 year 213 days since calibration Standby 19 901700 v Reference Offset Error 19 900000 V 0 001300 V 0 0151 hhp139 eps Touch Scale to identify this as the full scale endpoint for the DMM range To check the linearity error of the DMM select an output at a linearity checkpoint somewhere in the middle of the range such as 10 V If 10 V is entered this changes the display to 4 18 2013 14 33 4 3 ppm 1 year 213 days since calibration Standby 10 000208 v Reference Offset Scale Error 10 000000 V 0 001300 V 0 0151 hhp
106. P Address An internet IP address is necessary for all internet and TCP IP communications If DHCP is enabled the 5730A Calibrator will use the dynamic address supplied by the DHCP server If the DHCP server fails to supply the address the IP address will be shown as 0 0 0 0 Select the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP 5 8 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP is a client server protocol that eliminates the manual set up of permanent static IP addresses The DHCP server provides configuration parameters dynamic IP address subnet mask and default gateway IP addresses that are necessary for a client to participate in an IP network DHCP is the easiest way to configure the 5730A Calibrator for remote communication through the LAN interface DHCP is enabled by default when the Calibrator is shipped from the factory When connected to a network and the LAN port is enabled the Calibrator attempts to retrieve the parameters from a DHCP server necessary for communications To disable or enable DHCP on the Calibrator from the LAN menu touch DHCP If DHCP is already enabled ON is shown on the selection label Remote Interface Setup Ethernet Interface To use DHCP addressing 1 Connect a LAN cable from a hub to the LAN port on the back of the Calibrator 2 Touch Setup Menu gt Instrument Setup Remote Port gt Ethernet Setup to get to the Ethernet Setup menu 3 Select DHCP 4 Push to turn off the Calibrator
107. RANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE FLUKE SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES INCLUDING LOSS OF DATA ARISING FROM ANY CAUSE OR THEORY Since some countries or states do not allow limitation of the term of an implied warranty or exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages the limitations and exclusions of this warranty may not apply to every buyer If any provision of this Warranty is held invalid or unenforceable by a court or other decision maker of competent jurisdiction such holding will not affect the validity or enforceability of any other provision Fluke Corporation Fluke Europe B V P O Box 9090 P O Box 1186 Everett WA 98206 9090 5602 BD Eindhoven U S A The Netherlands 11 99 OPERATOR SAFETY SUMMARY WARNING HIGH VOLTAGE is used in the operation of this equipment LETHAL VOLTAGE may be present on the terminals observe all safety precautions To prevent electrical shock hazard the operator should not electrically contact the output HI or sense HI terminals or circuits connected to these terminals During operation lethal voltages of up to 1100 V ac or dc may be present on these terminals When the nature of the operation permits keep one hand away from equipment to reduce the hazard of current flowing through vital organs of the body
108. RS 30 036 1E 0001 1110 D TA US 81 03 1F 0001 1111 S NT SPACE 32 040 20 0010 0000 MSA 33 041 21 0010 0001 MSA 34 042 22 0010 0010 MSA 35 043 23 0010 0011 MSA 36 044 24 0010 0100 MSA 37 045 25 0010 0101 MSA amp 38 046 26 0010 0110 MSA i 39 047 27 00100111 MSA 40 050 28 0010 1000 L MSA g j 051 29 0010 1001 i MSA B 42 052 2A 0010 1010 MSA 43 053 2B 0010 1011 MSA c m 054 2C 0010 1100 E msa N 45 055 2D 0010 1101 N msa D 46 056 2E 0010 1110 Msa A I 47 057 2F 0010 1111 A MSA R D Y 0 48 060 30 0011 0000 D MSA 1 49 061 81 0011 0001 R MSA A 2 50 062 32 0011 0010 E MSA D 3 51 063 33 0011 0011 MSA 7 4 52 064 34 0011 0100 E MSA E 5 53 065 35 0011 0101 S MSA S 6 54 006 36 0011 0110 MSA S 7 55 067 37 0011 0111 MSA E S 8 56 070 38 0011 1000 MSA 9 57 071 39 0011 1001 MSA 58 072 3A 0011 1010 MSA 59 073 38 0011 1011 MSA lt 60 074 8C 0011 1100 MSA 2 61 0 5 8D 0011 1101 MSA gt 62 076 3E 001 1110 MSA 63 077 3F 001 1111 UNS FB 01 eps Appendix C Glossary adc analog to digital converter A device or circuit that converts an analog voltage to digital signals absolute accuracy Accuracy specifications that include the error contributions made by all equipment and standards used to calibrate the instrument Absolute accuracy is the number to compare with the UUT for determi
109. Returns Ethernet gateway address for LAN communication when P NOT in DHCP mode When in DHCP mode the response will be O GWADDR Example Returns 129 196 136 1 if the gateway address is set to 129 196 136 1 and DHCP is not enabled Returns default if DHCP is enabled ID52120 returns the number of 52120s connected and their serial numbers UE Sequential command Returns the number of 52120s connected and their serial Description nimbers Parameter None Response One or more integers ID52120 Example Returns 0 if no 52120As are connected Returns 2 7346432 8883213 if two 52120A s are connected with the indicated serial numbers 6 33 5730A Operators Manual Table 6 5 Commands cont IDN Sequential command Description Returns Calibrator model number and firmware version letters for the main inguard and if attached the 5725A Amplifier CPU Parameter None String string 0 string A message containing four fields separated by commas as follows Fluke Response 5730A Serial number Three firmware versions one each for the Main CPU the Inguard CPU and the Boost CPU Each version is separated by a plus If no amplifier is attached then its position third character contains an asterisk FLUKE 5730A 5248000 1 0 B INCR Overlapped command ignored if not in remote Description Increments the output amplitude and enters error mode the same as with the output adjustment knob in local opera
110. S 232 Port Setup The display changes to hhp149 eps Remote Interface Setup RS 232 Serial Interface Touch Data Bits to set the number of data bits Touch Stop Bits to set the number of stop bits Touch Stall to select a method of stall control Touch Parity to select the parity mode Touch Baud to set the baud rate Touch EOL to set the EOL End Of Line character to CR LF or the string CR LF ean nn BR 10 This step needs to be done only if setting up the interface for remote control of the Calibrator Touch one of the selections under Remote IF to set the label to Terminal or Computer Terminal sets the remote port to expect a human operator to be using a terminal attached to the RS 232 port to control the Calibrator This setting has the same effect as specifying TERM in the SP_SET or REM_MODE remote command parameter string Computer sets the remote port to expect a computer to be controlling the Calibrator over the RS 232 port This setting has the same effect as specifying COMP in the SP_SET or REM_MODE remote command parameter string 11 To designate a character or character string as the EOF End Of File character touch EOF 12 Enter the decimal code of the ASCII character s designated as EOF Appendix B contains a table of ASCII codes Verify that the selection is correct as shown on the display 13 To exit the setup menus touch Exit Serial Remote Cont
111. Sets the clock calendar to 8 00 a m October 10 2012 CLOCK e Sequential command Description Returns the setting of the clock calendar Parameter None Integer Time in 24 hour format as HHMMSS Response Integer Date as MMDDYY DDMMYY or YYMMDD depending on the setting of DATEFMT CLOCK Example Returns 150000 0901 12 if the clock calendar is set to 3 p m September 1 2012 6 27 5730A Operators Manual Table 6 5 Commands cont CLS Sequential command Description Clear status Clears the ESR ISCR the fault queue and the RQS bit in the status byte This command terminates pending operation complete commands OPC or OPC CUR_POST Sequential command ignored if not in remote Description Selects the binding posts non boosted current output Once set the Calibrator retains the current post setting during power off periods NORMAL Selects the OUTPUT HI binding post Parameter AUX Selects the AUX CURRENT OUTPUT binding post 1B5725 Selects binding posts on the 5725A CUR POST AA Sequential command Description 2g Returns the binding posts for non boosted current output Parameter None String NORMAL The OUTPUT HI binding post is selected Response AUX The AUX CURRENT OUTPUT binding post is selected 1B5725 The 5725A binding posts are selected DATEFMT Determine the format for clock calendar front panel date display and entry for entering Description and reading the da
112. Table 6 5 Commands cont EOL us Sequential command Returns the end of line terminator for outgoing data for a specified Description remote port Parameter 1 SERIAL USB ENET Response String EOL SERIAL Example Returns CRLF if the serial end of line terminator is set to CRLF ERR REF Selects the denominator for UUT error calculations NOMINAL to use the original reference TRUVAL to use the edited value ERR REF TRUVAL ERR REF Selects the denominator for UUT error calculations ERR REF Exemple Returns TRUVAL if the edited value is the denominator Sequential command Description Loads a byte into the Event Status Enable Register described under Check the Calibrator Status The decimal equivalent of the binary number to load into the register 0 255 only ESE 140 Example Enables bits 2 QYE 3 DDE and 7 PON and disables all the other bits See Check the Calibrator Status for details ESE Sequential command Description Returns the byte from the Event Status Enable register described under Check the Calibrator Status Integer Decimal equivalent of the register byte ESE Example Returns 140 if bits 2 QYE 3 DDE and 7 PON are enabled 1 and the rest of the bits are disabled 0 See Check the Calibrator Status for details 6 31 5730A Operators Manual Table 6 5 Commands cont ESR Sequential command Description Returns t
113. Table of Contents Chapter Title Page 1 Introduction and Specifications eese 1 1 Introduction ie ERR e RU i He HE Ie e on 1 3 Safety Information opne e eeu nete HR ee erect ee 1 5 Symbol er A 1 6 How to Contact Fluke Calibration eee 1 7 Instruction Manuals onise n Rede dde ec dene dee tine cce 1 7 Wideband AC Voltage Module Option 5700A 03 sse 1 8 Auxiliary Amplifiers ehe ee ee en e i De end 1 8 23725 ATBpIifiet ertet ee tte e ete er e e melle a Neate 1 9 521204 Amplifier is cost tenue RSS Heer ote disp ect ee edet 1 9 Support Equipment and Services sees 1 9 732B Direct Voltage Reference Standard sess 1 10 732B 200 Direct Volt Maintenance Program USA Only 1 10 742A Series Resistance Standards serene 1 10 Wideband AC Module Option 5700A 03 Calibration Support 1 10 The Components of the Calibrator esee 1 11 Sp cifications Cp 1 11 Specification Confidence Levels eene 1 11 Use of Absolute and Relative Accuracy Specifications ssse 1 12 Use of Secondary Performance Specifications 1 12 General Specifications ret eec etre te deter idee 1 13 Electrical Specifications dere dede tbe eei seen tet 1 15 DC Voltage Specifications cece eeeesecesecesecesecesecesee
114. The performance of a DMM or meter can be plotted as a graph of input stimulus and meter reading For a perfect meter the graph of the input stimulus would exactly match the graph of the reading The 5730A Calibrator measures and shows three types of UUT errors e Offset Error e Scale Error e Linearity Error 4 36 Front Panel Operation 4 Introduction to Offset Scale and Linearity Errors Offset Error Offset error can be measured directly by finding the Calibrator output that causes a meter reading of 0 V This error is called an offset because it reflects a fixed error that is present in all meter output readings For example if a meter reads 0 V when 1 3 mV is applied the meter has an offset error of 1 3 mV Figure 4 7 illustrates this example Calibrator Setting Offset 0 eK Meter Reading 1 3 mV 1 3 mV hhp052 eps Figure 4 7 Offset Error Scale Error Scale error sometimes referred to as gain error occurs when the slope of the meter response curve deviates from one A meter with only scale error no offset or linearity error will read 0 V when 0 V is applied but will read a value other than 10 V when 10 V is applied For example if a meter reads 19 900 V when 19 903 V is applied the meter has a scale error of 3 mV To isolate scale error offset error must first be subtracted Scale error is then simply the error measured near the full scale endpoint or Reference full scale Adjusted Calibr
115. UUT with a separate current input terminal Refer to Connect the Calibrator to the UUT in Chapter 4 for instructions for use of this binding post The SENSE binding post is used with resistance and voltage functions for sensing at the UUT after the external sense has been selected by the touch of External Sense or by remote command External sensing should be used in the dc voltage function when the UUT draws e enough current to produce a significant voltage drop in the cables and in the SENSE Binding resistance function when the UUT has a four wire ohms input and the Calibrator is Posts set to 100 kO or less External sensing can also be used in the two wire ohms function to allow the two wire compensation circuitry to the UUT terminals Refer to When to use External Sensing Four Wire Vs Two Wire Resistance Connections and Cable Connection Instructions in Chapter 4 for external sensing instructions and illustrations of SENSE connections 1 Visual Connection Management Terminals The appropriate terminals light up in green when is pushed whether in STANDBY or OPERATE The terminals offer visual guidance for cable connections for specific functions protect the user by indicating which terminals are active and protecting the calibrator from damage from incorrect connections Features 3 Rear Panel Features Rear Panel Features Rear panel features including all terminals sockets and connectors are shown in Figure 3
116. accuracy includes stability temperature coefficient linearity line and load regulation and the traceability to external standards It is not necessary to add anything to absolute accuracy to determine the ratios between the Calibrator specifications and the tolerance requirements of the calibration workload Relative accuracy specifications are provided for enhanced accuracy applications These specifications apply when range constants are adjusted see Range Adjustment in Chapter 7 To calculate absolute accuracy combine the uncertainties of the external standards and techniques with relative accuracy The accuracy specifications can be used to determine the component of instrumental uncertainty for a particular measurement condition at time of use When the Calibrator is correctly calibrated the specifications may be applied to subsequent uncertainty analyses as a Type B evaluation of measurement uncertainty This is estimated as a normal distribution with a coverage factor of K 2 58 Instrumental measurement uncertainty is one of many contributors that must be considered in a thorough uncertainty analysis Use of Secondary Performance Specifications Secondary performance specifications and operating characteristics are included in uncertainty specifications They are provided for special calibration requirements such as stability or linearity tests Introduction and Specifications General Specifications 1 General Specifica
117. age is changed from lt 22 V to gt 22 V STANDBY The output location changes The output function changes An exception to this is that the output stays operational when functions are changed between ac and dc voltage Multiplier keys to select output value multipliers For example if 3 3 Gy is entered the Calibrator output value is 33 mV The multiplier keys are micro 10 ES mili 10 ES kilo 10 EJ mega 10 Output function keys The output functions are Decibels relative to 1 mW Voltage Current Resistance Frequency When Hz is entered the Calibrator automatically switches to ac When a new signed or output value is entered without specifying Hz the Calibrator automatically switches back to dc Backspace Bksp key As a new output value is entered use this key to delete the last key entry The CE Clear Entry key clears a value entry in progress The Reset key returns the Calibrator to its initial power up state Power button Push the lighted power button to turn on or off the Calibrator B The ENTER key changes the output value just keyed in with the numerical ENTER multiplier and output function keys explained above Features 3 Front Panel Features Table 3 1 Front Panel Features cont Turn the Edit knob to the right to increase the output value of the active edit digit Turn the Edit knob to the left to decrease the output value of the active edit digit Error mode edit k
118. ailable to enhance the capabilities of the 5730A Calibrator Chapter 4 contains instructions for operation of the Calibrator with the options and accessories described here To order options or accessories call or write to a Fluke Calibration Service Center Wideband AC Voltage Module Option 5700A 03 The Wideband AC Voltage Module Option 5700A 03 is used to calibrate RF voltmeters and can be installed in the Calibrator The Module frequencies range from 10 Hz to 30 MHz It is a highly accurate low noise ac voltage source that maintains excellent flatness The module sources its output through a coaxial connector into a 50 Q load and this output can be from within any of seven ranges of values from 300 u V 57 dBm to 3 5 V 24 dBm selected in either volts or dBm The wideband module also functions with the Calibrator edit controls This will let the display show the error of a wideband meter in percentage of output or decibels Accessories Included with the wideband module are a Type N output cable and a 50 Q terminator The wideband module is calibrated to the end of its standard equipment output cable Table 8 1 summarizes the accessories available for the Calibrator After the table is a brief description of each accessory Table 8 1 Accessories Model Description 732B DC Voltage Reference Standard 742A 1 1 Q Resistance Transfer Standard 742A 10k 10 kQ Resistance Transfer Standard Low Thermal EMF Test Lead
119. alibration Check Calibration Check A calibration check is similar to artifact calibration with the primary differences being that no changes are made to the stored constants and the internal check standards are used as the reference points A calibration check produces a report similar to the normal calibration report and shows output shifts that would result from using the results of the calibration check This procedure can be performed from an external computer and can be set to run automatically with no assistance there is no need to enter the security passcode since no constants are changed Use calibration check at any time to confirm the integrity of the 5730A Calibrator without connecting external standards The calibration check is also useful for collecting a performance history Before this procedure is started make sure the Calibrator is powered on and has completed the appropriate warm up period Then follow this procedure to check the calibration 1 Touch the Setup Menu gt Calibration to bring up the Calibration menu 2 Touch Run Calibration Check to begin the procedure 3 As the calibration check proceeds the display indicates the current process of the calibration check When the check is complete the largest shift that is detected appears on the display The Calibrator tells when calibration is complete 4 Touch Continue to return to the Calibration menu A report of the output shifts can be saved from t
120. alue to be the present output value The same as touching the New Reference selection in local operation Parameter None OFFSET Sequential command ignored if not in remote Description E Enables and disables an offset for the output value Effective immediately when enabled Parameter ON or OFF OFFSET vit Sequential command Description Returns the offset value if the offset is enabled otherwise returns the number 0 0 Parameter 1 Float Offset value or 0 0 if no offset is active 2 Float Offset units OFFSET Returns 5 05000E 03 V if an offset of 5 05 mV is active Response Example OHMSREF Description Return calculated resistance reference as shown in calibration report average actual to Ls nominal ratio of the 100 ohm to 190 kohm resistors CAL From active calibration constants Parameter CHECK From calibration check constants PREV From previous calibration constants Response Float The resistance reference value Example OHMSREF CHECK 1 000021902360723E 00 6 37 5730A Operators Manual Table 6 5 Commands cont OLDREF Overlapped command ignored if not in remote Description Sets the Calibrator output to the previously programmed reference value The same as pushing the Eiin local operation ONTIME m Sequential command Description KANN Returns the time in minutes since the Calibrator was turned on Integer Number of minutes since power up
121. ar that digit The illustration of the display below assumes an entry of 20 dBm 4 14 2013 13 40 1 37 1 year 213 days since calibration Standby 350 00 w 1 0000 kHz po ee hhp125 eps 10 With the numeric keypad enter a frequency followed by Eg or KI if necessary The display now shows the amplitude and frequency of the entry If an entry error is made push to clear the display then reenter the value If the most recent digit entered is in error push f to clear that digit The display shown below assumes an entry of 21 MHz 4 18 2013 13 40 1 37 1 year 213 days since calibration Standby 350 00 w 1 0000 kHz 20dBm 21MHz hhp126 eps 4 28 Front Panel Operation 4 Variable Phase Output 11 Push EQUO The Calibrator clears the entry from the entry bar toward the bottom and displays in the larger area above No voltage is available at the WIDEBAND Type N coaxial connector until is pushed 12 Push to activate the Calibrator output The UUT will now respond to the applied voltage Note To deactivate the Wideband AC Module and switch to another output function touch Wideband again When sourcing an ac voltage or dBm level within the range of the standard ac voltage output mode that value is selected Otherwise the Display reads 0 mV dc When using units of dBm and switching between wideband and standard ac voltage output the amplitude changes This change occurs becau
122. arity The relationship between two quantities when a change in the first quantity is directly proportional to a change in the second quantity linearity error Linearity error occurs when the response curve of a meter is not exactly a straight line This type of error is measured by fixing two points on the response curve drawing a line through the points then measuring how far the curve deviates from the straight line at various points on the response curve MAP Measurement Assurance Program A program for a measurement process A MAP provides information to demonstrate that the total uncertainty of the measurements data including both random error and systematic components of error relative to national or other designated standards is quantified and sufficiently small to meet requirements MTBF Mean Time Between Failures The time interval in operating hours that can be expected between failure of equipment MTBF can be calculated from direct observation or mathematically derived through extrapolation Appendices C Glossary MTTF Mean Time to Fail The time interval in operating hours that can be expected until the first failure of equipment MTF can be calculated from direct observation or mathematically derived through extrapolation MTTR Mean Time to Repair The average time in hours required to repair failed equipment minimum use specifications A compilation of specifications that satisfies the calibration r
123. asscode is entered it is unsecured The Calibrator secures itself when it is reset or when the setup menus are closed The Calibrator can be unsecured at any time over the remote interface with the CAL SECURE command and by entering the passcode The front panel prompts for the passcode to unsecure the Calibrator before it can accept new values to be eventually secured The passcode contains 1 to 8 decimal digits The Calibrator is shipped with the passcode set to 5730 To change the passcode touch Setup Menu gt Calibration gt Change Calibration Passcode The Calibrator prompts for the current passcode and then the new passcode The passcode can also be changed over the remote interface with the CAL PASSWD command If the passcode for a particular Calibrator is lost contact Fluke Customer Support See How to Contact Fluke Calibration in Chapter 1 Artifact Calibration The 5730A Calibrator must be calibrated to external standards at the beginning of the calibration cycle The length of the cycle 24 hours 90 days 180 days or one year is selected in a Setup Menu described in Chapter 4 To calibrate the Calibrator apply three portable standards to the output binding posts 1 10 V dc voltage standard 2 1Q resistance standard 3 10 kQ resistance standard These standards are recommended e Model 732A or 732B DC Reference Standard e Model 742A 1 1Q Resistance Standard e Model 742A 10k 10Q Resistance Standard Use 5440A 7003
124. ation check Results are available via the CAL SLST or CAL SHIFT commands Parameter None 5730A Operators Manual Table 6 5 Commands cont CAL_CLST Sequential command Returns a list of names values of a particular group of calibration constants Returns active calibration constants Parameter Returns calibration check constants Returns previous calibration constants Description String lt EOL gt lt total number of constants gt lt EOL gt Response lt name gt lt value gt lt EOL gt lt name gt lt value gt lt EOL gt cont CAL_CLST CAL Could return 424 D3P 3 9817876E 02 Continues for about 400 pairs of names and values Example CAL_CONF Sequential command Sets the calibration specifications to a confidence level of either 99 or 95 Parameter CONF95 or CONF99 Sets 95 or 99 specifications CAL_CONF Description Sequential command p Returns the current calibration confidence level Response CONFS95 indicates 95 specifications a or CONF99 indicates 99 specifications CAL CONST Description Sequential command Returns the value of a particular calibration constant from a particular group of constants 1 CAL From active calibration constants Parara ter CHECK From calibration check constants PREV From previous calibration constants Description 2 Symbolic name of the calibration constant desired see Appendix D Float The value of the
125. atness constants into non volatile memory CAL TEMP 24 6 CAL WBFLAT START Connect to external standard as in Chapter 7 OPER Example INCR Enough to get the Calibrator output correct CAL WBFLAT NULL Repeat the preceding two commands for each calibration point CAL NULL automatically sources the next calibration point When OUT returns 0 V 0 all points have been calibrated CAL WBFLAT STORE Overlapped command ignored if not in remote Does Wideband AC Module Option 5700 03 flatness calibration There are two different calibration procedures for the wideband module gain and flatness Wideband gain is to be done at every calibration cycle Wideband flatness is needed only during full verification recommended every two years For reference the manual procedure for Description wideband flatness calibration is in Chapter 7 After sending a CAL WBFLAT START command the controller must adjust the Calibrator output with the INCR command until it matches the calibration voltage then 6 26 Remote Commands and Syntax 6 Commands Table 6 5 Commands cont CAL_WBGAIN Overlapped long term command ignored if not in remote Does Wideband AC Module Option 5700 03 gain calibration There are two different calibration procedures for the wideband module gain and flatness Wideband gain is to be done at every calibration cycle Wideband flatness is needed only during full verification recommended every two years For ref
126. ator Setting Reference full Scale Where Adjusted calibrator setting is the adjusted output using the knob that results in the UUT correctly reading nominal full scale Select a point just down from the UUT full scale endpoint for nominal full scale This keeps the UUT from ranging while adjustments are made For example use 19 9 V as the nominal full scale for a UUT that ranges at 20 V Scale Error 4 37 5730A Operators Manual The example in Figure 4 8 assumes no offset error The formula for scale error yields 19 9 19 903 Scale Error TY 0 000151 0 0151 96 Actual Se pes V Error 3 mV 19 9V Calibrator Setting Meter Reading hhp018 eps Figure 4 8 Scale Error Linearity Error Linearity error occurs when the response curve of a meter deviates from a straight line This type of error is measured by fixing zero and near full scale endpoints on the response curve drawing a line through the points then measuring how far the meter response deviates from the straight line at various points The error value is computed relative to the selected full scale point The formula for linearity error is Nominal setting Adjusted 5730A Setting Linearity Error Nominal Full Scale Where the nominal setting is calculated by subtracting the offset error and a proportional part of the scale error 4 38 Front Panel Operation 4 Introduction to Offset Scale and Linearity
127. bus follow Device dependent commands are messages used to transfer information directly between the 5730A Calibrator and the IEEE 488 controller Some commands cause an action to take place in the Calibrator Others called queries in the IEEE standards ask for information and always generate a response message from the Calibrator While message format is governed by IEEE 488 standards messages themselves can be unique to the Calibrator For example device dependent commands are used to set the output mode and amplitude and to switch from standby to operate Common commands defined by IEEE standards are used for functions common to most bus devices Examples include the command to reset a device RST and the query for device identification IDN Common commands and queries can be identified easily because they all begin with an asterisk Interface messages defined by IEEE standards have their own control lines and others are sent over the data lines by first asserting the control line ATN Attention An important thing to note about interface messages is that unlike device dependent and common commands interface messages are not sent literally For example when a device dependent query is sent to the Calibrator the controller automatically sends the interface message MTA My Talk Address RS 232 Serial Interface Use the RS 232 Port for Remote Control This procedure is intended for those who use the 5730A Calibrator serial
128. ce Fluke reserves the right to invoice Buyer for importation costs of repair replacement parts when product purchased in one country is submitted for repair in another country Fluke s warranty obligation is limited at Fluke s option to refund of the purchase price free of charge repair or replacement of a defective product which is returned to a Fluke authorized service center within the warranty period To obtain warranty service contact your nearest Fluke authorized service center to obtain return authorization information then send the product to that service center with a description of the difficulty postage and insurance prepaid FOB Destination Fluke assumes no risk for damage in transit Following warranty repair the product will be returned to Buyer transportation prepaid FOB Destination If Fluke determines that failure was caused by neglect misuse contamination alteration accident or abnormal condition of operation or handling including overvoltage failures caused by use outside the product s specified rating or normal wear and tear of mechanical components Fluke will provide an estimate of repair costs and obtain authorization before commencing the work Following repair the product will be returned to the Buyer transportation prepaid and the Buyer will be billed for the repair and return transportation charges FOB Shipping Point THIS WARRANTY IS BUYER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WAR
129. ce retracts and asserts RTS in response to same conditions as for XON XOFF protocol 6 5 5730A Operators Manual Commands Table 6 4 summarizes the commands by function Table 6 5 provides protocol details of the remote commands Table 6 6 provides protocol details of the three special commands available for serial remote control only The commands duplicate almost all activities that can be initiated from the front panel in local operation Separate headings for each command in the tables provide the parameters and responses if any and an example for cases in which the parameters are not self explanatory Multiple Commands Controllers may send commands all at once or one at a time To set the output to 100 mV de and then place the 5730A Calibrator into operate two separate commands may be used OUT 100 MV CR LF OPER lt CR LF gt Or enter it as a compound command on a single line OUT 100 MV OPER lt CR LF gt Coupled Commands 6 6 When a compound command follows another command there is a possibility that a fault can occur because of the action of the first command Such commands are called coupled commands An example of coupled commands that cause a fault is OUT 1V 1 MHZ followed by the compound command OUT 100V OUT 100 HZ The second command causes a fault because when the 5730A Calibrator encounters OUT 100V itis interpreted as 100V 1 MHz which is out of range of the Calibrator If only
130. ce voltage decreases from 4 5 V at 1 kHz to about 3 V at 10 kHz DG Offset orenetan a a Magnetic remanence that follows abrupt changes in output current level may cause small changes to DC current offset It is good practice to correct for offsets in DC measurements and techniques such as DC reversal measurement will result in best accuracy 1 33 5730A Operators Manual Operated within 5730A Control Loop all current ranges The current accuracy of the 52120A when controlled by a single 5730A applies to the parallel output of up to three 52120As connected as slaves Coverage factor k 2 58 99 confidence level Current Accuracy 1 year accuracy tcal n 5 C of output of range Frequency 5730A of output of range DC 0 015 0 010 10 Hz to 850 Hz 0 011 0 003 850 Hz to 6 kHz 0 052 0 005 6 kHz to 10 kHz See Operated Stand Alone current accuracy table in the 52120A Users Manual Notes Coverage factor k 2 00 95 confidence level Current Accu 1 year accuracy tcal E racy 5 C of output of range Maximum inductance for stability LCOMP OFF is 100 uH Maximum inductance for stability LCOMP ON is 400 uH for 2 A and 20 A ranges 100 uH on the 120 A range 1 tcalis the temperature at which calibration adjustment took place Frequency 5730A of output of range DC 0 012 0 008 10 Hz to 850 Hz 0 009 0 002 850 Hz to 6 kHz 0 040 0 004 6 kHz to 1
131. constant Example CAL CONST CHECK KV6 p Could return 6 5000010E 00 CAL COUNT Sequential command Returns the number of calibration constants that have been saved atthe end of a calibration procedure except for DC Zeros Response integer Parameter None Example CAL COUNT Returns 34 if calibration constants have been saved 34 times Description 6 20 Remote Commands and Syntax 6 Commands Table 6 5 Commands cont CAL_DATE Description Sequential command p Returns the date of the most recent calibration of the specified type Last 5725A Amplifier calibration Last calibration of the Calibrator Parameter Last wideband flatness calibration Last wideband gain calibration Last dc V zero calibration Integer Date as MMDDYY DDMMY Y or YYMMDD depending on the setting of Response DATEFMT CAL_DAYS Sequential command Description Returns the number of days elapsed since the last calibration activity of the specified type Last 5725A Amplifier calibration Last calibration of the Calibrator Parameter Last wideband flatness calibration Last wideband gain calibration Last dc V zero calibration Integer Number of elapsed days CAL INTV Sequential command ignored if not in remote Description Sets the calibration interval for main output calibration This value is saved in nonvolatile memory and used for calculating the Calibrator output uncertainty 1 90 180 or 365 the numbe
132. cs Key Knob and Bell Tests Remote Port Uncertainty Information Output Limits Sourcing Hardware Error Reference Date Time Format Language Display hhp104 eps About this Instrument opens a page to show non editable information about the Calibrator hardware and software About this Instrument Main SW Version v1 00 Inguard SW Version B Serial Number 0000000 Installed Hardware Assemblies hhp156 eps 4 49 5730A Operators Manual 4 50 There are selections without a submenu listed beneath them that are used to start processes For example the Run DC Zero selection from the Calibration menu starts the DC Zero process see Chapter 7 Calibration 3 04 2013 3 04 2013 8 29 2013 8 29 2013 DC AC Resistance Calibration Shifts Check Shifts Raw Data Temperature C hhp173 eps There are several types of selections that are used for settings In general these selections show what is being set in white and the value that it is currently set to is in amber See the Temperature C selection in the screen above Touchscreen selections with two possible values look like the Confidence Level selection shown in the screen below Touch Confidence Level to change the value from 99 to 95 Touch it again to change the value back to 99 Uncertainty Information Calibration Interval Confidence Level hhp107 eps Front Panel Operation Set up
133. cters Control C Line Feed Control J Carriage Return Control M Control R Control S XOFF Control Q XON These characters are processed as described above They cannot be a part of the PUD command The PUD command terminates with Line Feed or Carriage Return the same as all other serial remote commands 5 There is no SRQ capability when serial remote control is used The status registers still behave as described in this section but the Calibrator serial interface does not have a way to perform the SRQ function 6 There are three special commands available only for serial Ethernet USB remote control These are described in Table 6 6 Ethernet Interface The subsequent sections describe how to use an Ethernet interface with the Calibrator Set Up and Connect the Ethernet Interface Refer to the specifications for the LAN network and proceed as follows to set up the Ethernet interface for the application Touch Setup Menu gt Instrument Setup gt Remote Port Setup gt Ethernet Setup to get to the Ethernet Setup menu When addressing some LAN addresses computers will often interpret zeros in the IP address as OCTAL values As an example if the IP address is configured from the front panel as 129 196 017 023 and then a connection to the 5730A Calibrator is attempted connect with the IP address 129 196 17 23 Attempts to establish a connection to 129 196 017 023 may result in a connection request to 129 196 15 19 Set the I
134. cution fault results Parameter None Description 6 25 5730A Operators Manual Table 6 5 Commands cont CAL_TEMP Sequential command ignored if not in remote Sets the temperature for calibration This should be done before sending CAL_REF Description CAL WBFLAT CAL_WBGAIN or CAL_CHK commands Once set the temperature is used for all calibration activities until it is changed If the temperature is not set before a calibration activity the Calibrator uses a default of 23 0 C Temperature in degrees C CAL TEMP Sequential command Description Returns the previous ambient temperature setting used for a particular calibration procedure B5725 CAL WBFLAT WBGAIN or CHECK Float Temperature in degrees C CAL USB Te Overlapped command Saves a calibration report to a USB thumb drive connected to the Description front panel USB host port CAL Output change report for calibration Parameter CHECK Output change report for calibration check RAW A list of all calibration constants CAL USB RAW CAL WBFLAT inform the Calibrator of the fact by sending a CAL WBFLAT NULL command A series of points to test is selected automatically by the software After each CAL WBFLAT NULL command determine the calibration setting by sending an OUT command START Starts flatness calibration sources the first point Parameter NULL Calculates flatness constant sources the next point STORE Stores wideband fl
135. d A floating shield around voltage measurement circuitry inside an instrument The voltage guard provides a low impedance path to ground for common mode noise and ground currents thereby eliminating errors introduced by such interference working standard A standard that is used in routine calibration and comparison procedures in the laboratory and is maintained by comparison to reference standards zero error Same as offset error The reading shown on a meter when an input value of zero is applied is its zero or offset error 5730A Operators Manual
136. d not Cal Fine Tune 15th bit Down 2522 Could not Cal Fine Tune 15th bit Up 2523 Could not Cal 2 2 mV 22 mV step 1 2524 Could not Cal 2 2 mV 22 mV step 2 2525 Could not Cal 220 V AC Offset 2526 Could not Cal 220 V AC Gain 2527 Could not Cal 220 mV Offset 2528 Could not Cal 1100 V AC DC Offset 2529 Could not Cal 1100 V AC DC Gain 2530 Could not Cal 220 uA DC Zero 2531 Could not Cal 2 2 mA DC Zero 2532 Could not Cal 22 mA DC Zero 2533 Could not Cal 220 mA DC Zero 2534 Could not Cal 2 2 A DC Zero 2535 Could not Cal 220 uA DCI Meas 1 2536 Could not Cal 220 uA DCI Meas 2 2537 Could not Cal 2 2 mA DCI Meas 1 2538 Could not Cal 2 2 mA DCI Meas 2 2539 Could not Cal 22 mA DCI Meas 1 2540 Could not Cal 22 mA DCI Meas 2 2541 Could not Cal 220 mA DCI Meas 1 2542 Could not Cal 220 mA DCI Meas 2 2543 Could not Cal 2 2 A DCI Meas 1 2544 Could not Cal 2 2 A DCI Meas 2 2545 Could not Ext Cal 10 KO Std Meas 1 2546 Could not Ext Cal 10 KQ Std Meas 2 2547 Could not Ext Cal 10 KQ Std Meas 3 2548 Could not Cal 10 KO Meas 1 2549 Could not Cal 10 KO Meas 2 2550 Could not Cal 10 KO Meas 3 2551 Could not Cal 19 KO Meas 1 2552 Could not Cal 19 KO Meas 2 2553 Could not Cal 19 KO Meas 3 A 11 5730A Operators Manual A 12 2554 Could not Cal 100 KQ Meas 1 2555 Could not Cal 100 KQ Meas 2 2556 Could
137. ds and Syntax 6 Commands Table 6 5 Commands cont PUD Sequential command Description Protected user data command Allows a string of bytes to be stored in nonvolatile memory The Calibrator secure state must be set to off See the RPT STR command 0 lt user data ASCII Line Feed with EOI gt or lt non zero digit lt digits gt lt user data gt For both forms the bytes received in the lt user data gt field are stored in nonvolatile Parameter memory allowing up to 63 bytes The first form accepts data bytes after the 0 until the ASCII Line Feed character is received with an EOI signal In the second form the non zero digit specifies the number of characters 0 9 or ASCII 48 57 decimal in the lt digits gt field The value in the lt digits gt field defines the number of user data bytes in the lt user data gt field PUD 0FLUKE lt Line Feed with EOI gt or PUD 15FLUKE Both examples store the word FLUKE in the protected user data area Example N ote The I indicates that one digit must follow in this case 5 and the 5 indicates that five characters are in the remainder of the PUD message in this case FLUKE PUD Sequential command Description Returns the contents of the PUD Protected User Data memory Parameter None non zero digit digits user data The non zero digit specifies the number of characters that will follow in the lt digits gt Resp
138. duces a change in 5730A Calibrator state for example any OPER command is received during the execution of a long term command for example CAL CHK the command is ignored and a device dependent fault occurs Bit 3 in the Event Status Register is set to 1 if enabled and the fault code for the fault is available to be read from the fault queue See the FAULT and EXPLAIN commands for more information 6 7 5730A Operators Manual Definition Queries and Commands Messages directed to the 5730A Calibrator fall naturally into two categories commands and queries Commands instruct the Calibrator to do something or to set a value and no response is expected Queries generally ask only for information from the Calibrator and a response is always expected Some queries also require the Calibrator to take action For example the TST query has the Calibrator do a self test then send the result to the controller A query always ends with a question mark A command never ends with a question mark Tables 6 5 and 6 6 do not separate commands and queries They are all called commands and are presented together in one alphabetical list All query responses are generated instantly on receipt of the query Queries generate their output when the Calibrator executes the query rather than when the controller attempts to read the response The Calibrator generates the requested message and places it in an area of memory called the output buffer W
139. e and current Chapter 7 describes this procedure The 742A Resistance Standards are constructed of arrays of Fluke Calibration wirewound precision resistors and are ideally suited as support standards for the Calibrator Stability of the resistance transfer standards and their temperature coefficients make them ideal for easy transport to the Calibrator work environment Wideband AC Module Option 5700A 03 Calibration Support The Wideband AC Module Option 5700A 03 requires two kinds of calibration gain and flatness Gain constants are checked and recalibrated as part of the normal 5730A Calibrator semi automated calibration process Since frequency flatness is determined by such stable parameters as circuit geometry and dielectric constants flatness of the Wideband AC Module has excellent long term stability This stability gives the Wideband AC Module a two year calibration cycle for flatness calibration Flatness calibration is required only infrequently and can be done when the Calibrator is returned to a standards laboratory for periodic verification Chapter 7 of this manual contains the wideband gain and flatness calibration procedures Introduction and Specifications 1 The Components of the Calibrator The Components of the Calibrator The 5730A Calibrator is configured internally as an automated calibration system with process controls and consistent procedures Internal microprocessors control all functions and monitor perf
140. e Gain Adjust Is 0 2593 220 uA AC Flatness Calibration Failed 2594 2 2 mA AC Flatness Calibration Failed 2595 22 mA AC Flatness Calibration Failed 2596 220 mA AC Flatness Calibration Failed 2597 Bad Range Number For IAC Flatness Cal 2598 No Data For DCI Calibration 2599 2 2 V AC Flat Early Fail 2600 2 2 V AC Flat Bad AC Cal Sensor 2601 2 2 V AC Flat Diverge 2602 22 V AC Flat Early Fail 2603 22 V AC Flat Bad AC Cal Sensor 2604 22 V AC Flat Diverge 2605 220 V AC Flat Early Fail 2606 220 V AC Flat Bad AC Cal Sensor 2607 220 V AC Flat Diverge 2608 1100 V AC Flat Early Fail 2609 1100 V AC Flat Bad AC Cal Sensor 2610 1100 V AC Flat Diverge 2611 220 uA IAC Flat Early Fail 2612 220 uA IAC Flat Bad AC Cal Sensor 2613 220 uA IAC Flat Diverge 2614 2 2 mA IAC Flat Early Fail 2615 2 2 mA IAC Flat Bad AC Cal Sensor 2616 2 2 mA IAC Flat Diverge 2617 22 mA IAC Flat Early Fail 2618 22 mA IAC Flat Bad AC Cal Sensor 2619 22 mA IAC Flat Diverge 2620 220 mA IAC Flat Early Fail 2621 220 mA IAC Flat Bad AC Cal Sensor 2622 220 mA IAC Flat Diverge 2623 2 2 A IAC Flat Early Fail A 13 5730A Operators Manual A 14 2624 2 2 A IAC Flat Bad AC Cal Sensor 2625 2 2 A IAC Flat Diverge 2626 Illegal Ohms Null Function State 2627 Unknown Source Divider Identifier 2628 No Data For Ohms Calibration 2629 Illegal Ohms Calibration Config
141. e Table 7 3 For example if the dc voltage standard has an uncertainty of 2 5 ppm then the absolute uncertainty specifications listed in Table 7 3 must all be increased by 1 ppm Table 7 3 Standards for Calibration Fluke Traceable Nominal Uncertainty Specifications susceptible to Standard Quantity Value Limit Uncertainty Limit dc volts ac volts MAMAS 1 Resistance opm ppm 18199 Q 1 9 Q ac current dc current Calibration Procedure Before this procedure is started make sure the 5730A Calibrator is powered on and has completed the appropriate warm up period Follow this procedure to calibrate the main output functions 1 Touch Setup Menu gt Calibration The calibration menu is shown 2 Ifnecessary touch Temperature and enter the correct temperature in degrees Celsius to update the ambient temperature 3 Touch Run Artifact Cal to begin the procedure The Calibrator prompts the user to see the manual for the correct connections 4 Connect the 732B to the Calibrator as shown in Figure 7 4 7 11 5730A Operators Manual FLUKE 732B DC STANDARD AC PWR INCAL CHARGE LOW BAT 7 12 Figure 7 4 732B External Calibration Connections Calibrator OPERATE STANDBY ourput SENSE VAA A vn D AUX CURRENT OUTPUT V GUARD MAX WIDEBAND 7V RMS MAX hhp027 eps 5 Enter the true value of the 732B 10V output The true value is the value printed on the calibra
142. e interface port is changed to LAN from the Calibrator front panel a LAN server is initiated in the Calibrator that listens for client connections on the socket port at the specified IP address To establish a LAN connection to the Calibrator from a computer with either UNIX LINUX or MS DOS command prompts do the subsequent procedure 1 Touch Setup Menu gt Instrument Setup gt Remote Port gt Ethernet Setup to get to the Ethernet Setup menu 2 Change the remote interface port to Ethernet At the command prompt on the client computer enter telnet lt IP Address gt lt Socket Port gt As an example if the IP address is known to be 129 196 136 131 and the Socket Port is set to 3490 at a command prompt from any client computer enter telnet 129 196 136 131 3490 Once the internal LAN server connects with the client computer the LAN server will reject any other connection attempts by other computers clients and will tunnel a channel to the connected computer This prevents multiple computers from trying to control the Calibrator Terminate an Ethernet Connection To terminate the Ethernet connection the Telnet session must be terminated on the client computer Switching remote control ports will also terminate the Telnet session It may be necessary to terminate the Telnet session on the client computer but maintain the current LAN remote interface port selection Client Telnet session termination can vary from computer to co
143. e is on Phase lock Operate standby Whether an auxiliary amplifier is on Phase shift Guard Range lock Offset Sense Two wire compensation Scale Output limits Parameter None String A string that enables the settings that were set at the time of the LRN command SETMFC 00000000000024400000000000408F4000000000000024400000000000002440000000 Example 000000000000000000003091400000000000309 10C00000000000807640000000000080 76C000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000B 000158010000000E080000 Description Response 6 36 Remote Commands and Syntax 6 Commands Table 6 5 Commands cont MACADDR n Sequential command Returns MAC HW address for LAN communication The MAC Description address is a unique assigned value and cannot be changed Parameter Response MACADDR Example Returns six groups of hexadecimal numbers separated by colons for example 01 23 45 67 89 ab MULT Overlapped command ignored if not in remote Multiplies the reference magnitude by the parameter and changes the output to the new value The reference magnitude is the present output in direct operation and the reference in error mode Parameter Floating point number to act as a multiplier If the output is 10 V with error mode off and the command is sent MULT 1 9 the output changes to 19 V Description Example NEWREF Sequential command ignored if not in remote Description Sets reference v
144. e transfer data from Auxlnfo 6 Error retrieving parameter value from AuxInfo 7 Error retrieving section name from Auxlnfo 8 Interim directory not specified in Auxlnfo 9 Interim filename not specified in AuxInfo 10 Error reading Auxlnfo file 11 Source directory on USB device not specified in AuxInfo 12 Source filename on USB device not specified in AuxInfo 13 Cannot build a list of sequences to be executed 14 Backup directory not specified in AuxInfo config cal 15 Backup file not specified in AuxInfo config cal 16 Destination directory not specified in AuxInfo config cal 17 Destination file not specified in AuxInfo config cal 18 Source directory not specified in AuxInfo config cal 19 Source file not specified in AuxInfo config cal 20 Error setting mode of new file 21 Timestamp too long in Auxlnfo 22 Cannot close updated file config cal 23 Destination file does not exist config cal 5730A Operators Manual 24 Cannot get required AuxInfo parameters config cal 25 Cannot open new file config cal 26 Failed to read the existing destination file config cal 27 Failed to read the new source file config cal 28 Cannot remove existing backup file config cal 29 Cannot rename existing file to backup file config cal 30 Source file does not exist config cal 31 Invalid timestamp Cannot convert to epoch
145. ed to a device dependent command has occurred One possible cause for this error would be an attempt to execute OUT 1000000V which is outside the Calibrator range The command FAULT fetches the earliest fault in the fault queue which contains fault codes for the first 15 faults that have occurred QYE Query error fault The Calibrator was addressed to talk when no response data was available or appropriate or when the controller failed to retrieve data on the output queue OPC Operation complete All commands previous to reception of an OPC command have been executed and the interface is ready to accept another message 6 55 5730A Operators Manual Read the ESR and ESE To read the contents of the ESR send the remote command ESR The ESR is cleared set to 0 every time it is read To read the contents of the ESE send the remote command ESE The ESE is not cleared when it is read When either register is read the Calibrator responds by sending a decimal number that represents bits 0 through 15 Load the ESE Resetting the bits in the ESE can mask disable the associated bits in the ESR For example to prevent the occurrence of a command fault from causing bit 5 ESB in the serial poll status byte to go to 1 bit 5 in the ESE register can be reset to 0 Instrument Status Register The Instrument Status Register ISR gives the controller access to the state of the Calibrator including some of the information pres
146. election is used touch the desired resistance value and to TE select it To exit the menu touch the x on the top right of the table Push Eg or Eli if necessary Push fj 7 Push EX If a resistance value that is unavailable as in the subsequent example of 490 Q is entered the display prompts to try again 12 21 12 10 52am 0 00050mv 1 year 213 days since calibration Standby 0 00000 mv A Error 820 Calibrator Cannot Source That Value External 8 After a valid resistance is specified and is pushed the Calibrator clears the entry from the entry bar near the bottom and shows in the larger area above 9 Push Ezzm This resistance is now available at the output terminals hhp123 eps 3 15 2013 10 52am 10 0 ppm 1 year 213 days since calibration Standby 1 9000096 o External hhp124 eps 4 25 5730A Operators Manual 4 26 In resistance output the selections available at the bottom are e External Sense e External Guard e 2 wire Compensation e Wideband e Setup Menu In the resistance function two features are available to enhance accuracy four wire sensing and two wire compensation Two wire compensation works with either a two wire connection or a four wire connection to a two wire ohmmeter A full explanation follows Four wire connection is available for all resistance values except 100 MQ To activate four wire resistance turn External Sense on Figure 4 4
147. ented to the operator on the display and the display annunciators during local operation Instrument Status Change Register The Instrument Status Change Register ISCR indicates which ISR bits have changed status from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0 since the ISCR was last read The ISCR is cleared set to 0 when the Calibrator is turned on and every time it is read Instrument Status Change Enable Register The Instrument Status Change Enable Register ISCE is a mask register for the ISCR If a bit in the ISCE is enabled set to 1 and the corresponding bit in the ISCR goes to 1 the ISCB bit in the Status Byte is set to 1 If all bits in the ISCE are disabled set to 0 the ISCB bit in the Status Byte never goes to 1 The ISCE is cleared on power up Bit Assignments for the ISR ISCR and ISCE s u Je e oo ZERO AC XFER CAL SETTLED REMOTE WBND SCALE OFFSET eo a os poa t j o0 PLOCK PSHFT RLOCK RCOMP BOOST EXSENS EXGARD OPER 6 56 Remote Commands and Syntax 6 Check the Calibrator Status ZERO CAL When 1 DC Zero Cal is necessary ACXFER When 1 ac dc transfer is active SETTLED When 1 the output has stabilized to within specification REMOTE When 1 the Calibrator is under remote control WBND When 1 the wideband is active SCALE When 1 scaling is active OFFSET When 1 an offset is active PLOCK When 1 the Calibrator output is phase locked to an external source PSHFT When 1 variable phase output is active R
148. equential command Ignored if not in remote Sets the response type for a specified Description remote port 1 SERIAL USB ENET Parameter 2 COMP TERM REM MODE SERIAL COMP Sets the response type for serial communication to COMPUTER Example REM MODE ENET TERM Sets the response type for Ethernet communication to TERMINAL REM MODE Sequential command Returns the response type for a specified remote port 1 SERIAL USB ENET E REM MODE SERIAL xample P Returns TERM if the serial response type has been set to TERMINAL mode RPT STR Sequential command Loads the user report string The user report string can be read on the Display in local operation and appears on calibration reports The Calibrator secure state must be set to off String of up to 40 characters Description 6 42 Remote Commands and Syntax 6 Commands Table 6 5 Commands cont RPT_STR Sequential command Description Returns the user report string The user report string can be read on the Display in local operation and appears on calibration reports String Up to 40 characters RST Overlapped command ignored if not in remote Reset Sets the Calibrator to its power up default state OV O Hz Standby BOOST off W BND off EX GRD off EX SNS off phase lock off phase shift off range lock off SCALE off OFFSET off two wire compensation off and entry limits set to defaults Description RST does not affec
149. equirements of a measurement system or device The minimum use specifications are usually determined by maintaining a specified test uncertainty ratio between the calibration equipment and the unit under test noise A signal containing no useful information that is superimposed on a desired or expected signal normal mode noise An undesired signal that appears between the terminals of a device offset error Same as zero error The reading shown on a meter when an input value of zero is applied is its offset or zero error precision The degree of agreement among independent measurements of a quantity under the same conditions Same as repeatability The precision of a measurement process is the coherence or the closeness to the one result of all measurement results High precision for example would result in a tight pattern of arrow hits on a target without respect to where on the target the tight pattern falls predictability A measure of how accurately the output value of a device can be assumed after a known time following calibration If a device is highly stable it is also predictable If a device is not highly stable but its value changes at the same rate every time after calibration its output has a higher degree of predictability than a device that exhibits random change primary standard A standard defined and maintained by some authority and used to calibrate all other secondary standards process metrology
150. eration 4 Error Mode Operation 52120A Transconductance Amplifier Output The 52120A Amplifier boosts ac and dc current A maximum of three 52120A amplifiers may be connected together to the Calibrator When their outputs are connected in parallel they produce two for two 52120As or three for three 52120As times the current output providing up to 300 A of dc current and 360 A rms ac current To set a boosted output with the 52120A Amplifier 1 Install the 52120A as described in the 52120A Users Manual 2 Ifthe Boost Amp Types setting in the Setup Menu has been changed from the default select the 52120A for current boost as described at the beginning of this chapter 3 Make sure the Calibrator and 52120A are in standby STANDBY annunciator lit Push if necessary 4 Ifthe UUT is not connected connect it now as described earlier in this chapter under Connect the Calibrator to a UUT For boosted current connect to the 52120A binding posts Set the UUT to read the appropriate quantity Enter the necessary output value as described under Set the Output Current entries beyond the standard range of the Calibrator automatically select the amplifier 7 To deactivate the amplifier touch Boost again Error Mode Operation The output adjustment controls arrow keys and the rotary knob are used to adjust the output of the Calibrator incrementally except in the resistance function As this happens the Calibra
151. erence the manual procedure for Description wideband gain calibration is in Chapter 7 To calibrate wideband gain in remote the wideband output cable must be connected to the Calibrator SENSE binding posts as described in Chapter 7 then the controller must send commands in the same sequence as in the example For positive gain the center conductor is connected to SENSE HI For negative gain the center conductor is connected to SENSE LO PGAIN Calibrates wideband positive gain Parameter NGAIN Calibrates wideband negative gain STORE Stores wideband constants into non volatile memory CAL_TEMP 23 5 CAL_WBGAIN PGAIN Calibrates positive gain Example Reverse the SENSE connection now CAL_WBGAIN NGAIN Calibrates negative gain CAL_WBGAIN STORE CAL_ZERO Overlapped long term command ignored if not in remote Description Does internal zeros calibration This removes offsets on the 2 2V dc range It takes about 2 1 2 minutes plus 30 seconds if teamed with 5725A and does not require a change to the Calibrator security state Parameter None CLOCK Sequential command ignored if not in remote Description Sets the clock calendar The Calibrator security state must be set to off or an execution fault results Time in 24 hour format as HHMMSS Parameter Date as MMDDYY DDMMYY or YYMMDD depending on the setting the DATEFMT CLOCK 133700 071712 Sets the clock calendar to 1 37 p m July 17 2012 CLOCK 080000 101012
152. erwise touch Continue to accept and save the changes This lets the calibration process continue Operator Maintenance and Calibration T Calibration Resistance Stadard Calibrator OPERATE STANDBY CURRENT CHASSIS GROUND hhp028 eps Figure 7 5 742A 1 and 742A 10k External Calibration Connections 12 Disconnect the 10 kQ standard and connect the Calibrator to the 1 Q standard Enter the true value of the 1 Q standard If the standard is not between 0 9 Q and 1 1 Q an error message appears and the user can start over from this point with another standard 13 Push Continue to continue calibration When the internal 1 2 reference has been characterized a message is shown similar to previous messages Accept or reject the changes that are about to be made to the calibration constant 14 To reject the changes touch Cancel Otherwise touch Save to accept and save the changes and let the Calibrator complete the internal calibration steps 15 Once the internal steps have completed a screen similar to this is shown Setup menu Calibration gt Artifact Calibration Calibration Complete The largest change was 30 of spec 22VDC Would you like to save changes hhp215 eps 7 13 5730A Operators Manual 16 If the largest shift is acceptable touch Save to save the results thus adjusting the Calibrator If the security passcode has not already been entered
153. eseeesaecsaecaecsaecnaeenseeees 1 15 AC Voltage Specifications nnno niei i i E EEE E A 1 16 Resistance Specifications cire eter tee rere ete dete aR eee 1 22 DC Current Specifications sese a a ei nnnc einn 1 25 AC Current Specifications idee nece itd ertes reete tete ieri done 1 27 Wideband AC Voltage Option 5700 03 Specifications 1 30 52120A Specifications when Operated with the 57304A 1 31 52120A Electrical Performance Limits 000 0 cee cee eeseeseeeseecnceceseceneceseenseeees 1 31 Operated within 5730A Control Loop all current ranges 1 32 Coverage factor k 2 58 99 96 confidence level sssss 1 32 Coverage factor k 2 00 95 96 confidence level ssss 1 32 52120A COIL 3 KA 25 Turn Coil eee rennen 1 33 y 5730A Operators Manual 52120A COIL 6 KA 50 Turn Coil eese rennen 1 33 Jirjciiier eI 2 1 InttoductlOon 5 ecee n tea det eene e ete eee ee Eee ee ee 2 3 Unpack and Inspect the Calibrator eene 2 3 Placement and Rack Mounting essere entente 2 4 Cooling Considerations e ee ee E De ete e eene eoa 2 4 Mains Voltage Selection uote Perret tete cete ee sega 2 4 Connect to Mains POWE E aaa as E 2 6 Connecta 5725A Amplifier eene eaea neie Gee ree eode de 2 6 Connect a 521204 Amplifier sisi cic e
154. eys i4 moves the active edit digit one decimal place to the left switches the active edit field between the amplitude and frequency BG moves the active edit digit one decimal place to the right Front USB port Calibration report data can be saved to a flash drive inserted into this port The Calibration report process is explained in Chapter 7 Multiplier keys Ry multiplies the present output by 10 gn divides the present output by 10 Invert output key If the output function is dc voltage current ac voltage entered in dBm or a wideband output entered in dBm push to toggle the polarity of the output If the output function is ac voltage or current push to change the output to de If the Calibrator is the location of the ground reference point in a system the GROUND binding post can be used to connect other instruments to earth ground The chassis is normally connected to earth ground through the three conductor line GROUND cord instead of through the earth ground binding post Refer to Cable Connection Binding Post Instructions in Chapter 4 for details Included with the Calibrator is a brass strap that connects GROUND to V GUARD The V GUARD binding post provides an external connection point for the internal voltage guard For a UUT with floating ungrounded inputs the V GUARD should be connected to LO internally External Guard OFF For a UUT with a grounded V GUARD input the V GUARD must be externall
155. fect the state of the Calibrator are allowed to execute For example OUT returns the value of the Calibrator output setting and is executable in the local state OUT sets the output to another value but cannot be executed in local state Local with Lockout Local with lockout is identical to local except the Calibrator will go into the remote with lockout state instead of the remote state when it receives a remote command The local with lockout state is entered by executing the LOCKOUT statement from an IEEE 488 controller or by sending the LOCKOUT command from a serial controller e Remote When the Remote Enable REN line is asserted and the controller addresses the Calibrator as a listener it enters the remote state These conditions are met for example when a GPIB controller executes the statement OUT 10 V 1khz OPER In the remote state display changes to 12 21 12 10 52am 59 0 ppm 1 year 213 days since calibration Operate 10 00000 v 1 0000 kHz hhp150 eps Front panel operation is restricted to use of the power switch and the Local Control selection Touch Local Control or send the GTL Go To Local interface message to return the Calibrator to the local state One way to send the GTL interface message in some controllers is by executing the LOCAL statement 6 50 Remote Commands and Syntax 6 Local to Remote State Transitions e Remote with Lockout The remote with lockout state can be e
156. flatness of the Wideband AC Module has excellent long term stability Consequently a two year calibration cycle is adequate for flatness calibration and can be scheduled to coincide with the Calibrator shipment to a standards laboratory for periodic verification The subsequent procedure describes how to do the wideband gain calibration Note To do this procedure in addition to the standard equipment supplied with the wideband option a Type N female to double banana plug adapter e g Pomona 1740 is necessary Before this procedure is started make sure the Calibrator is powered on and has completed an appropriate warm up period Then proceed with this procedure to calibrate the wideband gain 1 Touch Setup Menu gt Calibration to show the Calibration menu 2 Connect the wideband output cable between the WIDEBAND connector and the SENSE binding post The center conductor of the 50 feedthrough should go to SENSE HI as shown in Figure 7 7 The GND tab on the adapter should be on the LO side CALIBRATOR 50 Q Feedthrough rea aes hhp030 eps Figure 7 7 Wideband Module Calibration Connection Operator Maintenance and Calibration T Wideband Flatness Calibration Procedure Touch Run Wb Gain Cal to begin calibration The screen prompts the user to check the manual for the correct connections As the wideband calibration proceeds messages are shown on the display identifying all processes as they are
157. he ATN signal false IEEE 488 standards define interface messages Table 6 2 lists the interface messages that the 5730A Calibrator accepts Table 6 3 lists the interface messages that the 5730A Calibrator sends The mnemonics listed in the tables are not sent as literal statements as commands are In this way they are different from device dependent and common commands Interface messages are handled automatically in most cases For example handshake messages DAV DAC and RFD automatically occur under the direction of an instrument interface itself as each byte is sent over the bus Table 6 2 Interface Messages Accepted by the Calibrator Mnemonic Name Function A control line used to notify all instruments on the bus that the next data bytes are an interface message If ATN is low these data Attention f bytes are interpreted as device dependent or common commands addressed to a specific instrument Data Sets the handshake signal line NDAC low Accepted Data Valid Asserts the handshake signal line DAV Clears the input output buffers A message that appears when the controller asserts the EOI signal END End line before sending a byte Go To Local Transfers control of the Calibrator from one of the remote states to one of the local states See Table 6 8 Local Transfers remote local control of the Calibrator See Table 6 8 Lockout Interface Dear A control line that sets the interface to a quiesce
158. he byte from the Event Status Register and clears the register The ESR is described under Check the Calibrator Status Integer Decimal equivalent of the register byte ESR Example Returns 140 if bits 2 QYE 3 DDE and 7 PON are set 1 and the rest of the bits are reset 0 See Check the Calibrator Status for details EXPLAIN Sequential command Description Explains a fault code This command returns a string that explains the fault code furnished as the parameter The fault code same as the parameter is originally obtained by sending the FAULT query The fault code an integer String An explanation of the fault code EXPLAIN 224 Example Returns Output Tripped To Standby EXTGUARD Overlapped command ignored if not in remote Description Sets the Calibrator to internal or external guard The same as pushing EX GRD in local operation The default is internal guard ON Sets the Calibrator to external guard Parameter i OFF Sets the Calibrator to internal guard EXTSENSE Overlapped command ignored if not in remote Description Selects internal or external sensing The same as pushing EX SNS in local operation The default if internal sensing ON Sets the Calibrator to external sensing Parameter f OFF Sets the Calibrator to internal sensing FAULT Sequential command Returns the earliest fault code contained in the Calibrator fault queue After the fault code is received
159. he path between the front panel terminals and the precision resistor Depending on how the meter is connected two wire compensation referenced at the UUT terminals Figure 4 4C or at the ends of the UUT test leads Figure 4 4D can be used See Resistance Output for information on turning on and off two wire compensation circuitry 4 7 5730A Operators Manual Figure 4 4B shows a meter connected in a two wire connection with the two wire compensation circuitry turned off For low resistances where uncompensated lead resistances are significant use the two wire compensation circuit and the connection in Figure 4 4C or 4 4D Use the connection in Figure 4 4C to calibrate the meter referenced at its terminals Use the connection in Figure 4 4D to calibrate the meter referenced at the end of its test leads Cable Connection Instructions To connect the 5730A Calibrator to a UUT 1 If the Calibrator is powered on push GJ or 0 B BIB Either action sets the Calibrator to 0 mV in standby 2 Determine the appropriate figure from Table 4 2 and refer to the preceding text and Table 4 1 to make appropriate connections to the UUT Table 4 2 UUT Connection Figures 5730A Output Figure AG curent ZA lt 10 KHz Wideband AC voltage option 5700A 03 5725A amplified output current only Front Panel Operation Connect the Calibrator to a UUT UUT Calibrator SENSE 04 WIRE Calibrator
160. he right of the display above the bottom row of selections to expose the phase controls 4 30 Front Panel Operation 4 Auxiliary Amplifier Use 6 Touch Phase Reference to toggle between INTERNAL the default not locked to anything and EXTERNAL 7 Ifthe Calibrator cannot lock onto the external signal for any reason it shows the message below 3 14 2013 10 52am 62 0 ppm 1 year 213 days since calibration Standby 1 000000 v 1 0000 kHz hhp129 eps 8 To reactivate the numeric keypad for controlling the output touch OK Phase locking remains active until the frequency is changed or turned off phase lock with the Phase Reference selection Auxiliary Amplifier Use Increase the output capability of the Calibrator with an auxiliary amplifier The Calibrator has rear panel connectors that interface with two different amplifiers Both amplifiers can be connected to the Calibrator simultaneously but only one amplifier can be designated as the voltage boost and one amplifier as the current boost in the setup menu Only one output can be active at a time Table 1 1 shows the ranges and functions supported by the 5725A The choice of active amplifier can be changed dynamically in a remote system since such systems can control any front panel function During boost operation operate the amplifier from the Calibrator front panel The Calibrator computes and supplies the correct excitation signal to drive the amplifier The
161. hen range constants are adjusted Relative uncertainty includes only the stability temperature coefficient noise and linearity specifications of the Calibrator itself reliability A measure of the uptime of an instrument repeatability The degree of agreement among independent measurements of a quantity under the same conditions Same as precision resistance A property of a conductor that determines the amount of current that will flow when a given amount of voltage exists across the conductor Resistance is measured in ohms One ohm is the resistance through which one volt of potential will cause one ampere of current to flow resolution The smallest change in quantity that can be detected by a measurement system or device For a given parameter resolution is the smallest increment that can be measured generated or displayed Appendices C Glossary rf radio frequency The frequency range of radio waves ranging from 150 kHz up to the infrared range rms root mean square The value assigned to an ac voltage or current that results in the same power dissipation in a resistance as a dc current or voltage of the same value rms sensor A device that converts ac voltage to dc voltage with great accuracy RMS sensors operate by measuring the heat generated by a voltage through a known resistance for example power therefore they sense true rms voltage scale The absolute span of the reading range of a measuremen
162. hen the controller addresses the Calibrator as a talker the contents of the output buffer are transmitted to the controller Some messages have both query and command forms for example PUD and PUD In such cases the command generally sets the value of a parameter and the query generally returns the most recent value of the parameter Some messages are queries only for example IDN Some messages are commands only for example RST Functional Elements of Commands 6 8 Table 6 1 lists the functional elements of commands described by the IEEE 488 2 standard that are used by the 5730A Calibrator This table is for those who have a copy of the standard and want to use it to pursue additional information The standard provides full definitions and syntax diagrams for each element Remote Commands and Syntax 6 Commands Table 6 1 Functional Elements of Commands Element Function A sequence of zero or more PROGRAM MESSAGE PROGRAM MESSAGE UNIT elements each of which is separated by a PROGRAM MESSAGE UNIT SEPARATOR element PROGRAM MESSAGE UNIT A command programming data or query received by the device COMMAND MESSAGE UNIT Dd or programming data received by the SEPARATOR that comprise a PROGRAM MESSAGE PROGRAM DATA SEPARATOR LUN DATA ELEMENTS listed under PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR Terminates a PROGRAM MESSAGE Specifies a function or operation Used with any associated PROGRAM DATA ELEMENTS Similar to a
163. his menu Develop a Performance History A Fluke Calibration specification is a set of performance limits that all products must meet To maintain consistent quality Fluke calibrators are specified with enough margin to include temperature line and load extremes plus additional margin for production This means that a typical Calibrator in a typical environment operates inside 50 of specification limits For some exacting applications it can be helpful to know just how accurately a particular Calibrator operates The proper way to do this is to accumulate a performance history by calibrating regularly and recording results on a control chart Calibrating regularly and recording the results on a control chart is tedious and requires a large array of equipment The Calibrator calibration check feature is an alternative with some distinct advantages e Calibrated check standards are already programmed into the unit External standards are not necessary e The process is consistent and automatic and it does not require operator assistance Each calibration check produces a new set of data points for accumulating a historical record When this process is externally automated significant history can be accumulated much faster than with a manual calibration 7 21 5730A Operators Manual 7 22 Save Calibration Reports Calibration reports can be created and exported to a USB flash drive from the Calibrator Calibration Report menu
164. hrough the 5725A binding posts An interface connector on the Calibrator rear panel accepts the cable to directly operate a 5725A Once the amplifier has been connected and the 5725A has been configured in a setup menu operation is controlled by the Calibrator Chapter 4 provides instructions for operating the 5725A amplifier The general specifications at the end of Chapter 1 include specifications for operating the 5730A Calibrator with the 5725A For other amplifier specifications refer to their instruction manuals Table 1 1 summarizes the extended capabilities offered by each amplifier Brief descriptions of the extended capabilities follow 52120A Amplifier The 52120A is available to extend the current range of the Calibrator An interface connector on the Calibrator rear panel accepts the cable to directly operate one or more 52120As in slave mode See Chapter 4 for operation instructions for the 52120A Transconductance Amplifier The general specifications at the end of Chapter 1 include specifications for operating the Calibrator with one or more 52120As 8 5 5730A Operators Manual 8 6 Appendix A Fault Codes 0 Level Faults Firmware Updater Backup directory not specified in AuxInfo 2 Backup filename not specified in AuxInfo 3 Destination directory not specified in AuxInfo 4 Destination filename not specified in AuxInfo 5 Error extracting required fil
165. iL C T E ES RR HE A 1 B ASCII and IEEE 488 Bus Codes sess B 1 OE GI ria RM KE EE C 1 5730A Operators Manual List of Tables Table Title Page I 1 Symbols ene eiua aei 1 6 1 2 Auxiliary Amplifier Data eee e eet edere 1 8 2 1 Standard Equipinent deep Ede ia iet me 2 3 2 2 Line Power Cord Types Available from Fluke Calibration 2 5 3 15 Front PaneL Features sisi iius tete em ee te Eee ene Sete 3 3 3 2 Rear Panel Features teda o Rae te deett ed e D te nein eee 3 7 4 1 Auxiliary Amplifier Data oes ec nie Rede 4 6 4 2 UUT Connection Figures i tte Ce ee lo b NU e Reden 4 8 4 3 Sections Of the Display es iii eet eerte d em ater 4 15 4 4 Keys that Exit Error Mode eed ee et Ree tee 4 34 5 1 Supported IEEE 488 Interface Function Subsets eeeeee 5 4 5 2 RS 232 Interface Parameter Choices sse 5 6 6 1 Functional Elements of Commands eese 6 9 6 2 Interface Messages Accepted by the Calibrator eeeeeene 6 10 6 3 Interface Messages Sent by the Calibrator eene 6 11 6 4 Command Summary by Function essere nennen 6 13 6 5 Commands iih aside an ete uie PIG D T a a aS 6 18 6 6 Serial Remote Control Commandis eese enn enne 6 49 6 7 Range Identifiers for Remote Commands esee 6 49 6 8 Operating State Trans
166. ically to correct the output or reading of an instrument calibration curve A smooth curve drawn through a graph of calibration points calibration interval The interval after which calibration must occur to maintain the performance of an instrument as stated in its specifications check standard A device used solely to verify the integrity of another standard For example in the Calibrator one Fluke RMS sensor continuously monitors the output voltage while a second Fluke RMS sensor confirms the integrity of the first characterization The development of a table of calibration constants or correction factors for use in correcting the output or reading of an instrument common mode noise An undesired signal that exists between a device s terminals and ground Common mode noise is at the same potential on both terminals of a device compliance voltage The maximum voltage a constant current source can supply control chart A chart devised to monitor one or more processes in order to detect the excessive deviation from a desired value of a component or process crest factor The ratio of the peak voltage to the rms voltage of a waveform with the dc component removed Appendices C Glossary current guard A generator that drives the inner shield of a triaxial cable with a signal of the same amplitude and phase as a Calibrator s ac current output signal on the center conductor The current guard shields the Calibrator s output
167. in Figure 7 3 For more information about these items contact a Fluke Calibration representative See the Contact Fluke Calibration section of this manual Table 7 2 User Replaceable Parts a o 00 um Number Oo moa e Co wem em C e u 7 5 5730A Operators Manual Figure 7 3 Replaceable Parts 7 6 Operator Maintenance and Calibration T 5730A Calibration 5730A Calibration The 5730A Calibrator makes use of internal check standards and measurement systems As a result it can be completely calibrated in place to full specifications with a small number of convenient portable environmentally tolerant standards available from Fluke Calibration This procedure is traceable to military standard requirements When manufactured each Calibrator is calibrated and thoroughly verified with process metrology and calibration standards traceable to the U S National Bureau of Standards A certificate of calibration is included The calibration verification procedure is recommended every 2 years or as required by established policies This procedure involves no adjustments It ensures internal processes are in control and establishes parallel external traceability paths for internal functions such as ac transfers that are never adjusted or corrected The Artifact Calibration Process Calibration requires only three external standards or artifacts 10 V 1 Q and 10 KQ Environmentally controlled
168. in full performance over a wide ambient temperature range e Automatic meter error calculation obtained through the use of a simple output adjust knob e Keys that multiply and divide the output value by 10 This simplifies work on meters with calibration points at decade multiples of a fraction of full scale e Programmable entry limits used to restrict the levels that can be entered into the Calibrator This prevents access to levels that may be harmful to equipment or personnel e Continuous display of Calibrator specifications at the selected operation point calibration interval and specification confidence level e An auxiliary current binding post to calibrate meters with separate current inputs without the need to move cables e Real time clock and calendar for date stamping reports and reminders issued to perform the dc zeros calibration procedure within the required interval e Offset and scaling modes that simplify linearity tests of multimeters e Variable phase reference signal output and phase lock input 1 5 5730A Operators Manual 1 6 Interface for the Fluke Calibration 5725A Amplifier Interface for the Fluke Calibration 52120A Amplifier Standard IEEE 488 GPIB interface that complies with ANSI IEEE Standards 488 1 1987 and 488 2 1987 EIA TIA 574 Standard RS 232 serial data interface for remote control of the Calibrator Extensive internal self testing and diagnostics of analog and digital functi
169. in values of 1 Q and 10 KQ to support the Calibrator Constructed of arrays of Fluke wirewound precision resistors these standards are ideally suited as support standards for the Calibrator Stability of the resistance transfer standards and their temperature coefficient make them ideal for easy transport to and operation in the Calibrator working environment The Calibrator uses 1 Q and 10 kQ resistor standards such as the 742A Series in its automated calibration procedure to establish external traceability Chapter 7 describes this procedure 5725A Amplifier The Fluke 5725A Amplifier is an external unit that operates under Calibrator control to extend ac voltage drive capabilities and both ac and dc current output range The amplifier adds the following capabilities to the Calibrator 1100 V ac range with no compromise in accuracy e Frequency limits at higher voltage increase to 100 kHz at 750 V 30 kHz at 1100V e Load limit increases to 70 mA for frequencies above 5 kHz e Capacitive drive increases to 1000 pF subject to the maximum output current A separate set of binding posts on the front panel of the 5725A supplies extended range ac and dc current outputs Since most meters have a separate input terminal for the high current ranges this eliminates the need to change cables during a procedure A Calibrator paired with a 5725A can also be configured to source all current both standard Calibrator generated outputs and its own outputs t
170. interface for remote control from a terminal or computer with a serial interface This section describes how to set up the RS 232 interface for remote control with protocol similar to IEEE 488 This chapter provides all details on data transmission The RS 232 interface is designed in accordance with EIA Electronic Industries Association standard RS 232 5 5 5730A Operators Manual 5 6 RS 232 Interface Specifications The RS 232 interface is configured as DTE Data Terminal Equipment A null modem cable with two female 9 pin subminiature D connectors must be used to connect the 5730A Calibrator to other DTE Data Terminal Equipment such as a typical computer serial interface Recommended cable is a Fluke RS43 The choices available and the defaults for all programmable interface parameters for the Calibrator are shown in Table 5 2 Table 5 2 RS 232 Interface Parameter Choices Parameter Choices Default Setting Flow Control Ctrl S Ctrl Q XON XOFF RTS or none Set Up and Connect the Serial Interface Refer to the specifications for the peripheral device and proceed as follows to set up the serial interface for the application 1 With the 5730A Calibrator power off connect a 9 pin D subminiature RS 232 null modem cable such as Fluke accessory RS43 to the rear panel RS 232 connector and to the peripheral device 2 Push to turn on the Calibrator Touch Setup Menu gt Instrument Setup Remote Port Setup gt R
171. internal check standards provide the primary reference points A stored table of calibration constants defines additional reference points for controlling the output Traceable calibration and adjustment to the specified level of performance is accomplished in a semi automated process that revises this table When finished with artifact calibration but before the new constants are saved the 5730A Calibrator presents the proposed adjustments as ppm of range and percentage change in specification for each range and function A list of changes can be saved to a file through the USB host port on the front of the Calibrator or send them to a computer through either the serial port USB device port Ethernet port or the IEEE 488 port Also on completion of calibration the Calibrator shows the largest proposed change Calibration can be completed as far as deriving and printing the proposed adjustments without entering the calibration protection passcode To save the changes in non volatile memory to adjust future outputs from the Calibrator the passcode must be entered from the front panel or with a remote command The passcode entry menu is shown on the display when necessary 5730A Operators Manual Establish Traceability Traceability to national standards is established as follows e Except for the internal ac dc transfer standard the internal check standards are directly calibrated by traceable external standards every time the Calib
172. ions The 5730A Calibrator is verified and calibrated at the factory prior to shipment to ensure it meets the accuracy standards necessary for all certified calibration laboratories By calibrating to the specifications in this chapter the high performance level can be maintained throughout the life of the Calibrator Specifications are valid after a warm up period of twice the time the Calibrator has been turned off up to a maximum of 30 minutes For example if the Calibrator has been turned off for five minutes the warm up period is 10 minutes Specification Confidence Levels 5730A Calibrator performance level is ensured by regular calibration to the primary performance specifications These specifications are provided at both the 99 and 95 96 confidence levels Calibration at the 99 confidence level is guaranteed by calibration at Fluke Calibration and Fluke Calibration Service Centers For information on selecting the confidence level refer to Chapter 4 The tables in this chapter provide specifications at both the 95 and 99 confidence levels for the Calibrators Included with these tables are operating specifications for use of the Calibrator with the Wideband AC Module Option 5700A 03 and the 5725A and 52120A Amplifiers 5730A Operators Manual Use of Absolute and Relative Accuracy Specifications To evaluate the 5730A Calibrator coverage of the calibration workload use the Absolute Accuracy specifications Absolute
173. itions eene nennen rennen nennen 6 51 6 9 Status Register Summaty 000 eee cee e aei i eoe neo ia inre Ee NETen 6 52 Tal Replacement EUses ione ete RC een t ee ten S ee NR 7 2 1 2 JUser Replaceable Patts ien ere ena eed iet 7 5 7 3 Standards for Calibtation oii tee M Pe Et b ER ee bled ete 7 11 Sal ACCESSORIES iode nii pt ile teint fates zedetessaiedesase tear sastig 8 3 xi 5730A Operators Manual xii List of Figures Figure Title Page 2 1 Available Mains Power Cord Types seen 2 5 2 2 Line Power Label and Switch Location 0 ccccec ccc ccccceeeessssecececeeeesenssaeeeeeeeenees 2 6 3 1 Eront Panel Feat res 215 decia Sai ne Bisel ae Ae eS 3 3 3 2 Rear Panel Features iiie tt re e EEG cance ER een ierat bee Lgs 3 7 4 1 UUT Connections DC Voltage AC Voltage lt 10 KHZ eee 4 9 4 2 UUT Connections AC Voltage gt 10 KHZ eere 4 10 4 3 UUT Connections AC Current 2A 00 0 ccccccccccccccccsesesscecceceeeceeeesssseceeeeeeseeentaaees 4 11 4 4 UUT Connections Resistance ssessseeesssseserecssssssescceesssssstcceessssostoecsessssesreeceesss 4 12 4 5 UUT Wideband AC Voltage Output 5700A 03 Option eee 4 14 4 6 UUT Connections 5725A Amplified Current Output sees 4 14 4 1 Offset Britons acne essa cas RD aeuo Uam enn 4 37 4 8 Scale Baro 45 uites tee yer e po Ht eae e n e t HET 4 38 4 9 Lmea
174. just phase manually using the knob cxqcK cK 180 90 0 90 180 hhp127 eps 6 To turn phase shift off touch the checkbox again To enter a new amplitude leaving the phase shift as is touch the X icon where the was to collapse the phase control window before the new amplitude is entered Phase Locking to an External Signal The phase lock feature locks the Calibrator main output signal in phase with an external signal 1 V rms to 10 V rms at 10 Hz to 1 2 MHz applied to the rear panel PHASE LOCK IN BNC connector This feature can be used with ac volts wideband voltage or current outputs and combine it with variable phase output The phase lock control is in the window with the phase output controls To lock onto an external signal 1 With the external signal source turned off connect a coaxial cable between the external signal source and the rear panel PHASE LOCK IN BNC connector Note When PHASE LOCK IN is used make sure the phase lock source is floating relative to the Calibrator output Ground loops that can occur if the two devices are not isolated can cause amplitude errors in the Calibrator output These errors may be particularly significant in the millivolt ranges 2 Set an ac voltage or current output as described under AC Voltage Output or AC Current Output Turn on the external signal source 4 Set the Calibrator frequency to within 2 of the external source frequency Touch the icon on t
175. le character string Parameter None 1 Integer ASCII code in decimal for the 1st character Response 2 Integer ASCII code in decimal for the 2nd character A 0 for response 1 or 2 means there is no character in that position SP SET Sets the serial port settings and saves them in nonvolatile memory One or more of the following in any order Baud rate as 9600 19200 38400 57600 or 115200 TERM or COMP See note below XON RTS or NOSTALL Stall method DBIT7 or DBIT8 Data bits SBIT1 or SBIT2 Stop bits PNONE PEVEN PODD or PIGNORE Parity CR LF or CRLF End Of Line Note The TERM or COMP parameter sets the responses in serial remote control to be appropriate for interactive terminal use or operation under program control Specifying TERM sets the remote port to expect a human operator using a terminal Specifying COMP sets the remote port to expect a computer program to be controlling the Calibrator This command has the same effect as setting Remote I F to TERMINAL or COMPUTER in the RS 232C Port Setup Menu Default 9600 TERM XON DBIT8 SBIT1 PNONE CRLF 19200 COMP XON DBIT8 SBIT1 PEVEN CRLF Parameter 6 44 Remote Commands and Syntax 6 Commands Table 6 5 Commands cont SP_SET me Sequential command Description Returns the serial port settings contained in nonvolatile memory Integer One of these baud rates 9600 19200 38400 57600 or 115200 String TERM or COMP Resp
176. lt 3529 A16 Pwr Amp 220V Range Attenuator Fault 3530 A16 8255 Was Reset 3600 Level Faults Self Diagnostics Power Supplies 3600 17S Supply Fault 3601 17S Supply Fault 3602 15S Supply Fault 3603 15S Supply Fault 3604 42S Supply Fault 3605 42S Supply Fault 3606 LH COM Ground Fault 3607 5LH Supply Fault 3608 5RLH Supply Fault Appendices Fault Codes A 3609 8RLH Supply Fault 3610 PA Supply Fault 3611 PA Supply Fault 3612 15 OSC Supply Fault 3613 15 OSC Supply Fault 3614 OSC COM Ground Fault 3615 S COM Ground Fault 3700 Level Faults Self Diagnostics Rear I O 3700 A21 8255 Control Word 3701 A21 8255 Port A Fault 3702 A21 8255 Port B Fault 3703 A21 8255 Port C Fault 3704 Assembly A21 Not Responding 3705 A21 Rear Panel Data Bus Fault 3708 A21 8255 Was Reset 3800 Level Faults Self Diagnostics Switch Matrix 3800 A8 8255 Control Word 3801 A8 8255 Port A Fault 3802 A8 8255 Port B Fault 3803 A8 8255 Port C Fault 3804 A8 Zero Amp Lo Noise Fault 3805 A8 Zero Amp Lo Offset 3806 A8 Zero Amp Lo Gain Fault 3807 A8 Zero Amp Hi Noise Fault 3808 A8 Zero Amp Hi Offset 3809 A8 Zero Amp Hi Gain Fault 3810 A8 2 2 V Amp Noise Fault 3811 A8 Zero Amp Offset 3812 A8 2 2 V Gain Fault 3813 A8 220 mV Offset Fault 3814 A8 220 mV Divider Fault 3815 A8 22 mV Divider Fault 3818 A8
177. mand errors When a command error occurs bit CME 5 in the Event Status Enable Register ESE goes to 1 General rules for parameter usage are 1 When a command has more than one parameter the parameters must be separated by commas For example OUT 1 V 100 HZ 2 Numeric parameters may have up to 255 significant figures and their exponents may range from 32000 to 32000 The useful range for 5730A Calibrator programming is 2 2 E 308 to 1 8 E308 3 Including too many parameters causes a command error Null parameters cause a command error for example the adjacent commas in CLOCK 133700 071787 5 Expressions for example 4 2 13 are not allowed as parameters Units accepted in command parameters and used in responses are e HZ frequency hertz e MHZ frequency megahertz e V voltage volts e A current amperes e OHM resistance ohms e MOHM resistance megohms e DB decibels e DBM decibels referenced to 1 milliwatt for ac voltage amplitude e PCT percent e PPM parts per million Multipliers accepted in command parameters are e MA mega or unit x 1 000 000 e K kilo or unit x 1 000 e M milli or unit 1 000 except MOHM and MHZ e U micro or unit 1 000 000 6 3 5730A Operators Manual Some examples of allowed unit and multiplier combinations are e MOHM and MAOHM are both interpreted as megohms e MHZ and MAHZ are both interpreted as megahert
178. ment Status Register essere nennen 6 56 Instrument Status Change Register eene 6 56 Instrument Status Change Enable Register eee 6 56 Bit Assignments for the ISR ISCR and ISCE esses 6 56 Read the ISR ISCR or ISCE essen 6 57 Load the SCE ces ette tret tet vote webbed teteen cancecvestavetaa take PR Eee cie 6 57 P ault Queue iet eas a ee ae ee 6 57 7 Operator Maintenance and Calibration 7 1 Introduction oreiro e eee E Der ette Ts Lett ette e eto Ceo eee afe eode 7 2 Euse Replaceineht ose MERE Mode ped 7 2 Clean tlie Air Filtet ia eee ett eee eH LED EL eee 7 4 Clean the BXIerIOE te i ne eet a E ET ie SEES 7 5 User Replaceable Parts en eerta eet e Tees 7 5 25730 Calibration aeo qr rediens 7 7 The Artifact Calibration Process eeseesseeseeeeeeeeenen ene en nen 7 7 Establish Traceability teer tee i tete aeaa 7 8 Calibration Reports tenet eee Lee rs t ie te tre dte De MM tee 7 8 Range Adjustment nd eei aee dee RE p E Rhe pas 7 8 D ONA o EE 7 8 Run DC ZetoS i eter o rt aba erri Perte cobs 7 8 DE Zeros Remindet eto teet e Certa det este etd D teet 7 9 Calibrations zi tecaneeu expone eedem 7 9 Calibration Security Passcode sessseseeeeeeenee nennen 7 10 Artifact Calibration poete i eet le Pe e ERE Eee debe 7 10 When to Adjust Calibrator Accuracy
179. mmands In addition to the status registers the Service Request control line SRQ available only when an IEEE 488 controller is used and a 16 element buffer called the Fault Queue provide status information Table 6 9 Status Register Summary Register READ Command Picea d RE STB or SPL Serial Poll Status Byte STB None SRE for some controllers Service Request Enable Register SRE Instrument Status Change Register ISCR Instrument Status Change Enable Register ISCE 6 52 Remote Commands and Syntax Check the Calibrator Status 6 Instrument Status Change Enable Register Read using ISCE Write using ISCE Instrument Status Change Register Read using ISCR Instrument Status Register Read using ISR A XS CSREES Oe ao Age amp LL KS DO amp iH Logical OR 3 12 A A 11 10 9 A A 4 8 1 Bit Change Logical OR Generation Service Request Event Status Register Read using ESR Event Status Enable Register Read using ESE Write using ESE Y SRQ on IEEE 488 Bus ry Figure 6 1 Overview of Status Data Structure Data Available Output Buffer Fault Available Fault Queue y Read
180. mputer Typically terminating the shell or command window in DOS will terminate the Telnet session When the client terminates the Telnet session the LAN server in the Calibrator goes back into listen mode waiting for a new client to make a LAN connection request Use of Ethernet Remote Control When the Ethernet port is used to remotely control the 5730A Calibrator either interactively with a terminal or under computer control operation is the same as with an RS 232 controller connected to the RS 232 port for control 5730A Operators Manual Use of USB 2 0 Remote Control 1 Touch Setup Menu gt Instrument Setup gt Remote Port 2 Ifthe Active Remote Port is not USB touch Active Remote Port 3 Touch USB 4 Touch Exit to exit the Setup Menu When the USB port is used to remotely control the 5730A Calibrator either interactively with a terminal or under computer control operation is the same as with an RS 232 controller connected to the RS 232 port for control When USB remote operation is used connect to the Calibrator with a virtual communication port on the computer and a terminal program such as PuTTY or HyperTerminal When the USB remote control cable is disconnected make sure to close the terminal program on the computer This properly terminates the virtual communication port session in the computer When the USB remote control cable is connected open the virtual communication port on the computer from within the termi
181. n complete condition and respond appropriately OPC can be used similarly to OPC except the program must read the ESR to detect the completion of all operations The WAI command causes the 5730A Calibrator to wait until any prior commands have been completed before continuing on to the next command and takes no other action WAI is a convenient way to halt operation until the command or commands preceding it have completed Remote Commands and Syntax Commands 6 Table 6 4 Command Summary by Function Error Mode Commands ADJOUT ERR REF ERR REF INCR MULT NEWREF OFFSET OFFSET OLDREF OUT ERR REFOUT SCALE SCALE SCAL ERR BRIGHTNESS BRIGHTNESS BTYPE BTYPE CLOCK CLOCK CUR_POST CUR_POST EMULATE EMULATE EXTGUARD EXTSENSE FORMAT LIMIT LIMIT LRN RANGE RANGELCK LCOMP 52120 POST 52120 XFERCHOICE Sets whether the choice to turn ac dc transfers off is given on the front panel GUI for ac V outputs XFERCHOICE Returns whether the choice to turn ac dc transfers off is given on the front panel GUI for ac V outputs 5730A Operators Manual Table 6 4 Command Summary by Function cont Returns a 1 when all pending remote operations are complete WAI Halts remote program execution until all pending remote operations are complete T Remote Commands and Syntax Commands 6 Table 6 4 Command Summary by Function cont Remote Interface Parameter Setting Command
182. n installed file 60 File on USB device same as installed file per timestamp 61 Error unmounting USB device 62 Cannot extract ver from line 1 of src file config cal 63 Cannot extract ver from line 1 of dest file config cal 64 Kernel Datapath1 MD5 hash failed 65 Kernel Datapath2 readback MD5 hash failed 100 Level Faults System 100 Low airflow 101 Cannot modify file property 102 Update execution error 103 Cannot open gpio PORT_A 200 Level Faults 5725 Boost 200 5725 No Error 201 5725 Self Test ROM Failure 202 5725 Self Test RAM Failure 203 5725 Self Test EEPROM Failure 204 5725 Self Test Data Bus Failure 205 5725 Self Test CLAMPS Circuit Failure 206 5725 Self Test HVCLR Circuit Failure 207 5725 Self Test DAC Failure 208 5725 Self Test Watchdog Timer Failure 209 5725 Current Heatsink Too Hot 210 Output Tripped To Standby 211 5725 Current Compliance Voltage Too High 212 5725 Current Compliance Voltage Too High 213 5725 400 V Supply Did Not Shut Off 214 5725 400 V Supply Did Not Shut Off 215 5725 Voltage Heatsink Too Hot 216 5725 Voltage Heatsink Too Hot 217 5725 400 V Supply Too Small 218 5725 400 V Supply Too Large 219 5725 400 V Supply Too Large 5730A Operators Manual 220 5725 400 V Supply Too Small 221 5725 400 V Supply Current Too High 222 Output Tripped To Standby 223 5725 400 V Supply Current Too High
183. n the output function amplitude and frequency Table 4 1 gives specific cable recommendations for all applications 4 5 5730A Operators Manual ACaution To ensure the Product is not damaged use only cables with correct voltage ratings Table 4 1 Auxiliary Amplifier Data Output Function Cable Recommendations DC voltag Low Thermal EMF Test Leads AC voltage lt 10 kHz 5730A 7002 banana plugs or AC current lt 2 A lt 10 kHz 5730A 7003 spade lugs DC current lt 2 A If external sensing is necessary use a twisted Resistance shielded pair SENSE GUARD Triaxial cable or Twinax e g Alpha 2829 2 OUTPUT Coaxial Or SENSE Coaxial OUTPUT Coaxial GUARD Lead Separate wire AC current with guard Triaxial cable 6 foot 2 m 50 O coaxial cable with type N male connector supplied with the option A 5 Q AC voltage gt 10 kHz Wideband AC feedthrough terminator is also supplied for connecting to meters with an impedance gt 50 Q Low Thermal EMF Test Leads Note 1 5730A 7002 banana plugs or Voltage boosted output 5725A 5730A 7003 spade lugs Output is at the Calibrator front panel 16 gauge or heavier twisted pair insulated wire Current boosted output 5725A as short as possible to minimize resistance and inductance Output is at the amplifier terminals Current boosted output 52120A Refer to the 52120A manual for cable requirements 1 Spade lugs provide a slightly better
184. nal program 5 12 Chapter 6 Remote Commands and Syntax Title Page Introd ctlOn 31 2 ete e tt Herbie ER Pei t Di De st bee d 6 3 Parameter Syntax Rules Rete tte Pe to 6 3 Extra Space Characters rer tee ete ete tree 6 4 Terminato S epe eate eee reese 6 4 Incoming Character Processing esses enne 6 4 Response Message Syntax eese ense entente nennen 6 5 Input Buffer Operation toe et Ct ee ite Qe EO dete bee rete e 6 5 COMMANAS EET 6 6 Multiple Commands eese E EEE rennen nnne 6 6 Coupled Commands it eit de tete tieu 6 6 Sequential and Overlapped Commands eene 6 7 Commands Ignored When Not in Remote eee 6 7 Commands that Require the Calibration Security Passcode 6 7 Long Term Commands ces ensiligi aa e P etienne pur 6 7 Definition Queries and Commands essere 6 8 Functional Elements of Commandis eene 6 8 Interface Messages IEEE 488 Only serene 6 10 Use of OPC OPC and WAPT e bestetertesei treo ebore teer tr eve 6 12 Local to Remote State Transitions sese 6 50 Check the Calibrator Status edere eedem 6 52 Serial Poll Status Byte 1 e rite nate e nete tate edges 6 54 Service Request Line SRQ esssssessseeeeeeeeeeee tenere 6 54 Service Request Enable Register sese 6 54 Load the SRE 4 zat e i
185. ne Sequential command Enables the local lockout state This command duplicates the IEEE 488 LLO Local Lookout message None Sequential command Enables the remote state This command duplicates the IEEE 488 REN Remote Enable message Table 6 7 Range Identifiers for Remote Commands Function Ranges DC220MV DC Voltage DC2_2V DC11V DC22V DC220V DC1100V DC220UA DC2 2MA DC22MA DC220MA DC Current RN DC2 2A DC5725A DC52120A 2A DC52120A 20A DC52120A 100A AC2 2MV AC22MV AC220MV AC Voltage m AC2 2V AC22V AC220V AC1100V AC5725A AC220UA AC2_2MA AC22MA AC220MA AC Current A AC2 2A AC5725A AC52120A 2A AC52120A 20A AC52120A 120A x OHMO OHM1 OHM1 9 i OHM10 OHM19 OHM100 OHM190 OHM1K Resistance OHM1 9K OHM10K OHM19K OHM100K OHM190K x OHM1M OHM1_9M OHM10M OHM19M OHM100M E WB1 1MV WB3 3MV WB11MV Wideband TL iS WB33MV WB110MV WB330MV WB1_1V WB3_5V 6 49 5730A Operators Manual Local to Remote State Transitions The 5730A Calibrator can be operated either locally from the front panel or remotely with remote control commands In addition to front panel and remote control operation the controller can be placed in a local lockout condition at any time by remote command When combined the local remote and lockout conditions yield four possible operating states e Local Front Panel Operation The Calibrator responds to local and remote commands but only remote commands that do not af
186. need replacement contact a Fluke Calibration Service Center To set the date or time enter a security passcode Touch Setup Menu gt Instrument Settings Date Time The display is shown below The time can be set without the security passcode The security passcode is explained in Calibration Security Passcode Date Format Month Day Year Time hhp108 eps 4 57 5730A Operators Manual Language To select the display language used for the 5730A Calibrator UI 1 Touch Setup Menu gt Instrument Settings gt Language 2 Touch the necessary language from the screen The choices are e English e French e Spanish e Simplified Chinese e Japanese e German e Portuguese e Russian e Korean Note The new language does not take effect until the Calibrator is powered down and back up again Push on the front panel Display Brightness To adjust the brightness of the display 1 Touch Setup Menu gt Instrument Settings gt Display 2 Touch the field in the Brightness selection and enter the necessary value with the numeric keypad Note that with brightness setting of 0 the display is still visible About This Instrument About this Instrument in the setup menu gives access to this information e Installed internal operating software revision letters e Whether the Wideband AC Module Option 5700A 03 is installed e Which auxiliary amplifiers are attached if any
187. ners without the slide rack mount Instructions are included with each kit Shielded IEEE 488 Interface Cables Y8021 and Y8022 Shielded IEEE 488 cables are available in two lengths see Table 8 1 The cables attach the Calibrator to any other IEEE 488 device Each cable has double 24 pin connectors at both ends to allow stacking Metric threaded mounting screws are provided with each connector Figure 5 1 in Chapter 5 shows the pinout for the IEEE 488 connector DC Voltage Reference Standard 732B The Fluke 732B is a rugged easily transported solid state direct voltage reference standard with a highly predictable 10 V output This predictability allows the Fluke Standards Laboratory as well as many Fluke customers to completely eliminate fragile saturated standard cells Many laboratories that maintain standard cells use the 732B as a transportable voltage standard eliminating the need to transport their standard cells The 732B can be short circuited even for extended periods of time without damage or loss of stability The 732B maintains full specified stability over a temperature span of 18 C to 28 C The Calibrator uses a 10 V reference standard such as the Fluke 732B in an automated menu prompted procedure to establish voltage traceability Chapter 7 describes this procedure Options and Accessories 8 Accessories 1 Qand 10 k2 Resistance Standards 742A 1 and 742A 10k The 742A Series Standard Resistors are available
188. nguard 4006 Inguard CPU POP 4007 Inguard CPU Reset 4008 Inguard CPU A D Timeout 4009 Inguard CPU Timed Out On Main CPU 4010 Inguard CPU Detected A Command Error 4012 Sequencer Timed Out Waiting For Inguard 4013 Illegal Analog State Command For 5725 4014 Sequencer Timed Out Waiting for 5725 4015 Could not Queue Command To 5725 BX 4016 Reply From 5725 Was Garbled 4100 Level Faults Serial Interface Driver 4100 Bad Virtual channel 4101 Framing 4102 Input Queue Overflow 4103 Overrun 4104 Parity 4105 Uart Failed Self Test 4107 Remote Interface UART 4108 Remote Interface USB 4109 Guard Crossing UART 4110 Boost Crossing UART 4200 Level Faults Instrument State Manager 4200 Bad Boolean Value Selector 4201 Meaningless Target State Value 4202 Meaningless Actual State Value 4203 Mystery Target Actual State Difference 4204 Display Brightness Setting Exceeds Limits 4400 Level Faults General Purpose Utility 4400 Invalid Command 4401 Floating Point Math Error A 23 5730A Operators Manual A 24 4500 Level Faults Analog Value Finder 4500 VFdcDac Value Out Of DAC Range 4501 Bad Range Selector 4502 Non Vfinder Range 4504 User Range Adjust of 0 I used 1 4505 Divide By 0 In VF correct 4700 Level Faults Ethernet 4700 Port value out of range 4701 Could not open the ENET port 4702 Error reading from ENET port 4703 Ethernet address not
189. ning test specification ratio assert To cause a digital signal line to go into a logic true state af audio frequency The frequency range of human hearing normally 15 Hz 20 000 Hz artifact standard An object that produces or embodies a physical quantity to be standardized for example a Fluke 732B dc Voltage Reference Standard base units Units in the SI system that are dimensionally independent All other units are derived from base units The only base unit in electricity is the ampere buffer Refers to either an area of digital memory for temporary storage of data or an amplifier stage before the final amplifier burden voltage The maximum sustainable voltage across the terminals of a load C 1 5730A Operators Manual calibration check A fast simple automated procedure to provide added confidence between calibration recalls and data that can be used to develop a history of Calibrator performance between calibrations No changes are made to stored constants and the internal check standards are used as the reference points instead of external standards as in the routine calibration procedure calibrate To compare a measurement system or device of unknown accuracy to a measurement system or device of known and greater accuracy to detect or correct any variation from required performance of the unverified measurement system or device calibration constant A correction factor that is applied manually or automat
190. nnen 5 6 Set Up and Connect the Serial Interface 5 6 Serial Remote Control Setup Procedure eee 5 7 Exceptions for Serial Remote Control eene 5 7 Ethernet Intetface 3 o nest ce eet He te eit le be CERO RIDERE 5 8 Set Up and Connect the Ethernet Interface esee 5 8 Set the IP Addtess 3 usd eee ete ee Ote ee eee 5 8 Select the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP 5 8 Set a Static Internet Address tenete 5 9 Configure the General Network Socket Port eee 5 9 Configure the LAN Default Gateway sese 5 10 Set the LAN Subnet Mask ceca tie a ee tees 5 10 Read the MAC Address tec eie oett ege et ie Lcd 5 10 Establish an Ethernet Connection eeeeeeeeeeeeneneen nennen 5 11 Terminate an Ethernet Connection eese nennen 5 11 Use of Ethernet Remote Control esee 5 11 Use of USB 2 0 Remote Control eeeeeeeeeeeeneren nennen 5 12 Remote Commands and Syntax eene 6 1 Introduction 4 ihe e etos e ee PH CR REEF T 6 3 Parameter Syntax Rules eet tee ee tee eene eee eaa 6 3 Extra Space Characters eornm tette ee ties pus 6 4 T rinitiatOrs ebrei Hate eere o HE Leiter does 6 4 Incoming Character Processing eseeeeeeeeeeeeneennen nnne 6 4 Response Message Syntax eene nennen nennen nenne 6 5 5730A Opera
191. nob then press Continue 200 00000 v Reference Error 200 000000 dBm 0 00ppm ia hhp217 eps 8 Push Ezzmu to activate the Calibrator output Turn the output adjustment knob on the Calibrator until a null is achieved on the null detector and then touch Continue 9 Touch Save to be prompted to enter the security passcode if the Calibrator has not been unsecured already It then saves the new range adjustment for the 220 V dc range 10 If Discard is touched the result is discarded and the Range Calibration screen is shown Operator Maintenance and Calibration T Range Adjustment Null Detector Calibrator caT LV OPERATE STANDBY SENSE e VAA A vn 9 9 752A Voltage Divider Standard 732B Voltage Reference Standard FLUKE 732B DC STANDARD REFERENCE STANDARD SM SM m my m S SMR hhp029 eps Figure 7 6 220 V DC Range Calibration Connections 7 17 5730A Operators Manual Calibrate the Wideband AC Module Option 5700A 03 The Wideband AC Module Option 5700A 03 can be installed in the 5730A Calibrator The module needs to be calibrated for both gain and flatness The gain should be calibrated when the 5700A 03 main output functions undergo their routine calibration Since frequency flatness is determined by stable parameters i e circuit geometry and dielectric constants the
192. nominal line Settling Time sss 3 seconds to full accuracy 1 second for range or polarity change 1 second for 1100 V range OvershoOt ne een 5 96 Common Mode Rejection 140 dB DC to 400 Hz Remote Sensing sss Available 0 V to 1100 V on 2 2 V through 1100 V ranges 5730A Operators Manual AC Voltage Specifications 5730A AC Voltage Specifications 99 Confidence Level Frequency Range Hz 10 20 20 40 40 20k 20k 50k Tnv 50k 100 k 100 k 300 k 300 k 500 k 500k 1M 10 20 20 40 40 20k 20k 50k TUE 50 k 100 k 100 k 300 k 300 k 500 k 500k 1M 10 20 20 40 40 20k 20k 50k TOON 50 k 100 k 100 k 300 k 300 k 500 k 500k 1M 2 2 mV 22 mV 220 mV 10 20 20 40 40 20k 20k 50k 50 k 100 k 22V Tis 100 k 300 k 300 k 500 k 500k 1M 22V 10 20 20 40 40 20k 20k 50k 50 k 100 k 100 k 300 k 300 k 500 k 500 k 1M 220V 100 nv 1100 Vv 250 5 100 5 85 5 220 5 500 6 1000 12 1400 25 2900 25 250 5 100 5 85 5 220 5 500 6 1000 12 1400 25 2900 25 250 15 100 8 65 8 135 8 370 20 650 25 1400 30 2700 60 250 50 95 20 45 10 75 12 95 40 350 100 1000 250 1600 400 250 500 95 200 45 70 75 120 95 250 285 800 1500 4000 1600 4000 1700 4000 250
193. not Cal 190 KQ Meas 1 2557 Could not Cal 190K Meas 2 2558 Could not Cal 1 MQ Meas 1 2559 Could not Cal 1 MQ Meas 2 2560 Could not Cal 1 9 MQ Meas 1 2561 Could not Cal 1 9 MQ Meas 2 2562 Could not Cal 10 MQ Meas 1 2563 Could not Cal 10 MQ Meas 2 2564 Could not Cal 19 MQ Meas 1 2565 Could not Cal 19 MQ Meas 2 2566 Could not Cal 100 MQ Meas 1 2567 Could not Cal 1 KQ Meas 1 2568 Could not Cal 1 KQ Meas 2 2569 Could not Cal 1 9 KQ Meas 1 2570 Could not Cal 1 9 KQ Meas 2 2571 Could not Cal 100 Q Meas 1 2572 Could not Cal 100 Q Meas 2 2573 Could not Cal 190 Q Meas 1 2574 Could not Cal 190 Q Meas 2 2575 Could not Cal Ohms Divider Meas 1 2576 Could not Cal Ohms Divider Meas 2 2577 Could not Cal 10 Q Q Meas 1 2578 Could not Cal 10 Q Meas 2 2579 Could not Cal 19 Q Meas 1 2580 Could not Cal 19 Q Meas 2 2581 Could not Ext Cal 1 Q 0 26V CM Meas 2582 Could not Ext Cal 1 O Ext Meas 2583 Could not Ext Cal 1 Q 0 13V CM Meas 2584 Could not Ext Cal 1 O Int Meas 2585 Could not Ext Cal 1 9 Q 0 18V CM Meas 2586 Could not Ext Cal 1 9 Q 0 12V CM Meas 2587 Could not Ext Cal 1 9 Int Meas 2588 Could not Cal Wideband Gain Appendices Fault Codes A 2589 Bad Cal Step Selector 2590 A D Appears To Have Failed 2591 User Range Gain Adjustment Is 0 2592 Stored User Rang
194. nt state Addresses a specific device on the bus as a listener The controller sends MLA automatically whenever it directs a device dependent or common query to a specific instrument My Listen Address Remote Commands and Syntax 6 Commands Table 6 2 Interface Messages Accepied by the Calibrator cont Addresses a specific device on the bus as a talker The controller sends MTA automatically whenever it directs a device dependent or common query to a specific instrument anas Transfers remote local control of the Calibrator See Table 6 8 esd Ret Set the handshake signal line NRFD low Selected Identical to DCL but only operates when the Calibrator is SDC Device Clear addressed as a listener My Talk Address SPD Salle bel Cancels a Serial Poll Enable Disable SPE Serial Poll Causes the Calibrator to return a Status Byte to the next command Enable that address it as a listener no matter what the command is Unaddresses a specific device on the bus as a listener The UNL Unlisten controller send UNL automatically after the device has successfully received a device dependent or common command Unaddresses a specific device on the bus as a talker The UNT Untalk controller sends UNT automatically after it receives the response from a device dependent or common query Table 6 3 Interface Messages Sent by the Calibrator memore wm Fem A message that appears when the Calibrator asserts the EOI control END
195. ntered from remote or local with lockout but not directly from local Remote with lockout is similar to the remote state but restricted the Local Control is not shown on the display To return the Calibrator to the local with lockout state the GPIB controller sends GTL With some IEEE 488 controllers this can be done manually by executing a WBYTE statement To return the Calibrator to the local state the GPIB controller unasserts the REN control line When the Calibrator 1s in remote with lockout the display appears as follows 12 21 12 10 52am 59 0 ppm 1 year 213 days since calibration Operate 10 00000 v 1 0000 kHz hhp151 eps Table 6 8 summarizes the possible Remote Local state transitions Table 6 8 Operating State Transitions Typical GPIB Command Local LocalLockout LLO REN o O REN LOCKOUT o Local GTL or LOCAL LOCAL Remote ice selection Remote Lockout LLO REN o O REN LOCKOUT o Local Lockout Remote Lockout MLA REN REMOTE or any CC NN command Local PRENnot not LOCAL From Use Remote Lockout Local Lockout GTL Manually using WBYTE 6 51 5730A Operators Manual Check the Calibrator Status The controller has access to six status registers for the 5730A Calibrator which indicate the Calibrator conditions in the as shown in Figure 6 1 Each register bit is explained under separate headings for each register Table 6 9 lists each register and its remote co
196. ntroduction and Specifications 1 Electrical Specifications 52120A Specifications when Operated with the 5730A Line Power Voltage range 100 V to 240 V Frequency c 47 to 63 Hz Voltage variations eseeesesess 10 about line voltage Power consumption sesseseeeees 1500 VA Transient overvoltage ssssssssss Impulse withstand overvoltage Category Il of IEC 60364 4 443 Dimensions HxWxL With feet E 192 mm x 432 mm x 645 mm 7 6 in x 17 0 in x 25 5 in Without feet eceeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeetenees 178 mm x 432 mm x 645 mm 7 0 in x 17 0 in x 25 5 in WIGHT ic a anaE 25 kg 54 Ib Temperature Operating REPRE EUER 5 C to 35 C 41 F to 95 F Calibration tcal ssssessses 16 C to 30 C 61 F to 86 F ien T 0 C to 50 C 32 F to 122 F Dcum 20 C to 60 C 4 F to 140 F 100 hours Warmup Time sese Twice the time since last warmed up to a maximum of 1 hour Humidity non condensing ie ume 80 96 5 C to 31 C 41 F to 88 F ramping linearly down to 50 at 35 C 95 F Ij p M MH 95 96 0 to 50 C 32 F to 122 F Altitude Operatitig ire n eerte irte ete Reds 2 500 m 8 200 ft maximum Non Operating siiiu terina 12 000 m 39 400 ft maximum Shock and Vibration
197. o Wideband AC output the dBm level changes to 10 log 180 0 mW 22 5527 dBm To enter a negative dBm value push Push KA E3 or ES if necessary Push Kl for volts or push for a dBm level The display now shows the amplitude of the entry If an entry error is made push to clear the display then reenter the value If the most recent digit entered is in error push to clear that digit The display shown below assumes an entry of 19 V 3 14 2013 10 52am 0 00050mV 1 year 213 days since calibration Standby 0 00000 mv hhp114 eps Front Panel Operation 4 Set the Output 9 Enter a frequency with the numeric keypad followed by ES or Gif necessary The display now shows the amplitude and frequency of the entry If an entry error is made use gj to clear the most recently entered digit or push to clear the display Reenter the value The display shown below assumes an entry of 2 8 kHz 3 14 2013 10 52am 0 00050mV 1 year 213 days since calibration Standby 0 00000 mv 19V 2 8kHz hhp115 eps 10 Push XU The Calibrator clears the entry from the entry bar toward the bottom and shows in the larger area above No voltage is available at the output terminals until is pushed 11 Push to activate the Calibrator output The UUT will now respond to the applied voltage In AC voltage output the selections available at the bottom are External Sense External Guard Boost Wideband Set
198. o start Error Mode turn the rotary knob push an arrow key or push E When error mode is entered the starting value is the reference from which errors are computed A new reference is established when you exit and then reenter error mode Exit Error Mode Table 4 4 lists the actions that cause the Calibrator to exit error mode Table 4 4 Keys that Exit Error Mode Key or Selection Action Establishes a new reference that is equal to ten times the previous reference value Establishes a new reference that is equal to one tenth of the previous reference value Offset Selection Identifies the present output as a zero scale endpoint for scaling and establishes 0 0 as the new reference Identifies the present output as a full scale endpoint for scaling cale Selection fj gt j j and causes the display to show scale error Returns to the power up state Setup Menu Selection Opens the Setup menu Note The Scale and Offset selections are revealed by touching the icon on the right of the display above the bottom row of selections The New Ref selection appears with the Scale and Offset selections once error mode is entered 4 34 Front Panel Operation 4 Error Mode Operation Use Error Mode When error mode is entered from any output function except resistance the least significant digit on the Display is highlighted Push to enter error mode and select the frequency line for adjustment first but only if the f
199. oduct Instruction Manuals The 5730A Calibrator ships with 5730A Getting Started 5730A Operators Manual provided on CD ROM or a printed copy is available for purchase through the Fluke Calibration Service Department To order refer to the Fluke Calibration Catalog or contact a Fluke Calibration sales representative See How to Contact Fluke Calibration This manual provides complete information to install and operate the 5730A Calibrator from the front panel or with remote commands It also provides a glossary of calibration related terms as well as general items such as specifications and error code information 1 9 5730A Operators Manual Wideband AC Voltage Module Option 5700A 03 The Wideband AC Voltage Module Option 5700A 03 can be installed in the 5730A Calibrator The module is a high accuracy low noise extremely flat ac voltage source to calibrate RF voltmeters with a frequency range of 10 Hz to 30 MHz Output is in seven ranges from 300 uV 57 dBm to 3 5 V 24 dBm through a Type N coaxial connector into a 50 Q load The output level is selected in volts or dBm through either the front panel controls or under remote control The wideband module also functions with the Calibrator output adjust controls that display the error of a wideband meter in either percentage of output or in decibels Included with the wideband module is a Type N output cable and a 50 terminator The wideband module is calibra
200. oduct is safely grounded as described in Chapter 2 Make sure the rear power switch is on and then push B9Bito turn on the 5730A Calibrator When the Calibrator is turned on it takes approximately 50 seconds to complete its power up process After the power up process the display shows the normal operation screen 12 21 12 10 52am 0 00050mv 1 year 213 days since calibration Standby 0 00000 mv External OFF The Calibrator is in standby mode with the internal sensing and internal guard configured The Calibrator can now accept entries from the front panel hhp102 eps 4 3 5730A Operators Manual Warmup Make sure the 5730A Calibrator is warmed up before use The environmentally controlled components inside must be stable to meet or exceed the specifications in Chapter 1 Sufficient warmup times are e Ifthe Calibrator has been powered off for 1 hour or more allow at least 30 minutes of warmup time e If the Calibrator has been powered off for a length of time less than 1 hour allow it to warm up for at least twice the length of time it was turned off For example if it has been powered off for 10 minutes allow at least 20 minutes of warmup time Product Use Touchscreen navigation is used to move throughout the 5730A Calibrator user interface UI and menus Reset the Calibrator At any time during front panel operation return the Calibrator to the power up state with Ge When Ris pushed it
201. oltage reference standard with a highly predictable 10 V output The 732B can be short circuited even for extended periods of time without damage or loss of stability It maintains full specified stability over a temperature span of 18 C to 28 C The 5730A Calibrator uses a 10 V reference standard such as the Fluke Calibration 732B in its semi automated calibration procedure to establish external voltage traceability Chapter 7 describes this procedure 732B 200 Direct Volt Maintenance Program USA Only The Fluke Calibration 732B 200 Direct Volt Maintenance Program provides laboratories with NIST traceable 10 V calibration uncertainty as low as 0 6 parts per million ppm The program maintains the 732B that is kept in the laboratory To do this 1 Fluke Calibration sends a calibrated Fluke Calibration owned 732B standard together with all necessary connection cables and instructions for comparison with a customer 10 V reference standard 2 The customer takes a series of readings over five days and returns the results to the Fluke Calibration Standards Laboratory 3 The Fluke Calibration Standards Laboratory assigns a value to the customer 10 V standard relative to the NIST legal volt and sends a report of calibration 742A Series Resistance Standards The 5730A Calibrator uses 1 and 10 kQ resistor standards such as the 742A Series in its semi automated calibration procedure to establish external traceability of resistanc
202. on This chapter is a reference for the functions and locations of the front and rear panel features It also provides descriptions of each feature Read this information before the 5730A Calibrator is used Front panel operation instructions for the Calibrator are in Chapter 4 Remote operation instructions are in Chapter 6 Front Panel Features Front panel features including all controls displays indicators and terminals are shown in Figure 3 1 Each front panel feature is briefly described in Table 3 1 hhp006 eps Figure 3 1 Front Panel Features Table 3 1 Front Panel Features Description The color touch sensitive display shows the output amplitude frequency and other active conditions and messages The display provides controls not available with the keys alone The Calibrator interface is made up of multiple menus described in Chapter 4 Numbered keys to enter the output amplitude frequency and other data such as the time and date To enter a value push the digits of the output value a multiplier key if necessary and an output function key Then push ENES For example for an output of 20 mV push 2 Lo ij KB EHE activates the programmed output 5730A Operators Manual Table 3 1 Front Panel Features cont deactivates the programmed output The output automatically changes to STANDBY if Zis pushed The output volt
203. ong term command ignored if not in remote Description Runs a self diagnostics routine If any faults are detected they are logged into the fault queue where they can be read by the FAULT query The response to faults that occur during remote controlled diagnostics depends by the setting of the DIAGFLT command ALL Runs all diagnostics routines D5700 Runs all Calibrator diagnostics DV5725 Runs 5725A voltage diagnostics Parameter DI5725 Runs 5725A current diagnostics CONT Continues execution of diagnostics ABORT Terminates execution of diagnostics DIAGFLT Sequential command ignored if not in remote Determines the response to faults that occur during remote controlled diagnostics In all Description cases the fault encountered is logged into the fault queue before the Calibrator takes any action as set by this command The settings of this command are saved in nonvolatile memory The default is ABORT HALT Halts and waits for DIAG CONT or DIAG ABORT Parameter ABORT Terminates diagnostics CONT Diagnostics continues to completion logging any more faults as encountered DIAGFLT Sequential command Returns the setting of DIAGFLT None String HALT ABORT or CONT ECHO Sequential command Description Echoes a string back to the remote interface port Upper or lower case remains intact in this command Any string String including delimiting quotation marks ECHO 123abc456 Example Returns
204. onnect the Calibrator to a UUT Note that for boosted current connect to the 5725A binding posts and for boosted voltage connect to the Calibrator binding posts Set the UUT to read the appropriate quantity Enter the necessary output value as described under Setting the Output Current entries beyond the standard range of the Calibrator automatically select the amplifier Voltage entries in the 220 V 1100 V range automatically select the amplifier Note that the 5725A takes over the 1100 V range of the Calibrator Boosted voltage output is available at the front panel of the Calibrator Boosted current output is available at the front panel of the 5725A Amplifier When the 5725A binding posts are selected the Current Output selection indicates the output location If the entry has caused a change of output location Ezzm must be pushed to activate the amplifier When the range is set to AUTO the amplifier is automatically disabled whenever a current level within the range of the Calibrator is set Locking the range turns off this auto disable so the amplifier can be used at lower current levels Note The 5725A can source a current below 2 2 A to take advantage of the amplifier higher compliance voltage of the amplifier To do so lock onto the 11 A range when the Calibrator is set for over 2 2 A or set the lower current and touch Boost to turn on the amplifier To deactivate the amplifier touch Boost again Front Panel Op
205. ons Resolution Absolute Accuracy 5 C from calibration temperature Relative Accuracy 1 C Range 24 Hours 90Days 180Days iYear 24Hours 90 Days ppm output nA 99 Confidence Level ppm output pA a 40 0 8 45 0 8 47 0 8 50 0 8 26 0 3 30 0 3 22A 60 15 70 15 80 15 90 15 40 7 45 7 SOSA agir 330 470 340 480 350 480 360 480 100 130 110 130 95 Confidence Level a amp ppm output nA ppm output pA EM 35 0 7 40 0 7 42 0 7 45 0 7 22 0 25 25 0 25 22A 50 12 60 12 70 12 80 12 3246 40 6 5725A Amplifier 330 470 340 480 350 480 360 480 100 130 110 130 Note Maximum output from the calibrator s terminals is 2 2 A Accuracy specifications for 220 uA and 2 2 mA ranges are increased by a factor of 1 3 when supplied through 5725A terminals Specifications are otherwise identical for all output locations 1 Add to accuracy specifications 200 x I ppm for gt 100 mA on 220 mA range 10 x I ppm for gt 1 A on 2 2 A range 1 27 5730A Operators Manual DC Current Secondary Performance Specifications and Operating Characteristics Temperature Stability Coefficient Maximum 1 c 0 10 C k aak ora Bandwidth Bandwidth 24Hours 10 40 C and C9mpliance Ada E 0 1 10 Hz m Hz 10 kHz 4 C Quir EAE T 0 50 nA V a ppm ppm output nA Q ppm EE output nA C nA 6 9 6 5 6 50 9 300 1 2
206. ons Universal Serial Bus USB 2 0 high speed interface device port for remote control of the Calibrator Integrated 10 100 1000BASE T Ethernet port for network connection remote control of the Calibrator USB Host port to save calibration reports to a flash drive Visual Connection Management output terminals illuminate to help show correct cable connection configurations Soft Power automatic selection of line voltage frequency LCD Color VGA display with touch panel overlay A traceable calibration procedure for all modes and ranges that requires only 10 V 1 Q and 10 KQ external standards with only occasional independent verification Automated calibration check that provides added confidence between calibration recalls and data that can be used to document and characterize Calibrator performance between calibration recalls Introduction and Specifications 1 Safety Information Safety Information A Warning identifies conditions and procedures that are dangerous to the user A Caution identifies conditions and procedures that can cause damage to the Product or the equipment under test AAWarnings To prevent possible electrical shock fire or personal injury e Read all safety information before you use the Product e Carefully read all instructions e Do not use the Product around explosive gas vapor or in damp or wet environments e Use this Product indoors only e Do not put the Product where access to the
207. ons of OPC OPC and WAT in Table 6 5 for more information Commands Ignored When Not in Remote The 5730A Calibrator can receive and execute most commands in either local or remote state Commands that change the state of the Calibrator are prevented from executing unless the Calibrator is in the remote state At the end of each command description in Tables 6 5 and 6 6 it is noted if the command is ignored if the Calibrator is not in the remote state When the command description says ignored when not in remote it means that if sent to the Calibrator in the local state the command will not work and logs a fault into the fault queue Or it returns the fault message if in serial remote terminal mode To put the Calibrator in remote send the REMOTE command described in Table 6 6 to the Calibrator Refer to Remote Local State Transitions for more information Commands that Require the Calibration Security Passcode The subsequent commands do not work unless preceded by the CAL SECURE OFF passcode CLOCK CAL STORE CAL RNG STORE CAL WBFLAT STORE CAL WBGAIN STORE PUD and RPT STR Attempting to use any of these commands without doing so logs a fault into the fault queue Or it returns the fault message if in remote terminal mode Long Term Commands Remote commands that take a relatively long time to execute are identified as such in Table 6 5 which follows the command summary in Table 6 4 If a command that pro
208. onse field These characters are 0 through 9 ASCII 48 through 57 decimal The value of the number in the lt digits gt field defines the number of user data bytes that follow in the lt user data gt field The maximum response is 64 characters PUD Example Returns 205FLUKE assuming that this is stored as in the example for PUD above RANGE n Sequential command Description Returns the present output range String Symbolic name of the range from Table 5 4 RANGELCK Overlapped command ignored if not in remote Description Locks or unlocks the present output range The range automatically unlocks if the output function changes for example from dc volts to dc current ON Locks the range Parameter OFF Unlocks the range 6 41 5730A Operators Manual Table 6 5 Commands cont RCOMP Overlapped command ignored if not in remote Description While a resistance output 19 kQ or lower is selected RCOMP activates or deactivates two wire ohms compensation circuitry ON Turns on the two wire compensation circuitry Parameter NM OFF Turns off the two wire compensation circuitry REFOUT Sequential command Description Returns the value of the reference which is the output value of the Calibrator the last time a new reference was established with an OUT NEW REF or MULT J Float Output amplitude Response A String Units V A OHM or DBM String Frequency 0 if dc E S
209. onse type String XON RTS or NOSTALL Stall method Response String DBIT7 or DBIT8 Data bits String SBIT1 or SBIT2 Stop bits String PNONE PEVEN PODD or PIGNORE Parity String CR LF or CRLF End Of Line 9600 TERM XON DBIT8 SBIT1 PNONE CRLF Sequential command Description Loads a byte into the Service Request Enable register SRE described under Check the Calibrator Status The decimal equivalent of the binary number to load into the register SRE 56 Example T j Enables bits 3 IIR 4 MAV and 5 ESR in the Service Request Enable register SRE Sequential command Description Returns the byte from the Service Request Enable register described under Check the Calibrator Status Integer The decimal equivalent of the register byte SRE Example Returns 56 if bits 3 IIR 4 MAV and 5 ESR are enabled 1 and the rest of the bits are disabled 0 See Check the Calibrator Status for details 6 45 5730A Operators Manual Table 6 5 Commands cont STATE uu Sequential command Description Returns the long term state of the Calibrator Parameter None 1 Integer Gross state with the subsequent responses O0 Operating 10 Calibration wideband positive gain Self diagnostics 11 Calibration wideband negative gain Self diagnostics halted by a fault 12 Wideband flatness calibration Calibration check 13 Range calibration DC zeros calibration
210. or 818 Frequency Too Large For Calibrator 819 Frequency Too Small For Calibrator 820 Calibrator Cannot Source That Value 821 V Limit Outside Calibrator Ability 822 Limit Outside Calibrator Ability 823 Cannot Adjust Frequency To lt 0 Hz 824 Offset Not Allowed Now 825 Scale Not Allowed Now 826 Ohms Reading Set Too High 827 Ohms Reading Set Too Low 828 Cannot Use External Sense Now 829 Cannot Use Phase Shift Now 830 Cannot Use Phase Lock Now 831 Cannot Use 2 Wire Comp Now 832 Could not Do Default Wideband Output 833 Bad Selector For Set Get Item 834 Cannot Boost This Output Mode 835 Cannot Use Ext Sense On Selected Range 836 Cannot Use 2 Wire Comp On Selected Range 5730A Operators Manual 837 Cannot Lock This Range 838 Cannot Set Clock Cal Is Secured 839 Cannot Fmt EEPROM Cal Is Secured 840 Illegal Output Post For Current 841 No Boost Available For Selected Output 842 Not A Valid Wideband Flatness Point 843 Wideband Flatness Cal Is Not Active 844 Report String Too Long 845 Cannot Store Cal Is Secured 846 Range Calibration Is Not Active 847 Magnitude Too High For Range Cal 848 Magnitude Too Low For Range Cal 849 Invalid Calibrator Setup Block 850 Cannot Format 5725 Switch In NORMAL 851 Cannot Store 5725 Switch In NORMAL 852 Calibration Steps Out Of Order 853 Cannot Use External Guard Now 854 Cannot Use Ext
211. or each range Current output shifts for each range ac and dc Resistance shifts for each value 5725A Amplifier output shifts if attached Wideband AC Module Option 5700A 03 output shifts if installed Operator Maintenance and Calibration T Save Calibration Reports The shifts of references and outputs are given both as absolute shifts in V A or ohms and also for non zero magnitudes as shifts relative to the previous value in parts per million ppm or percent 46 The specified accuracy for the output is also shown and the ratio of the shift to that accuracy in percent The Calibration Shift report file name is CSyymmdd CS V where yymmdd is the date today For example a calibration shift report compiled on October 28 2013 would be saved to CS131028 CS V Calibration Check Shift Results The Calibration Check report presents changes in the magnitude of self correction generated by calibration check Calibration check uses internal standards rather than external standards as the basis for comparison and does not make permanent changes to calibration constants This report is available only after a calibration check has been performed and until the Calibrator is reset The report contains the subsequent information and is shown below Heading that shows the date and time the report was saved and user report string Modules present installed or attached Most recent calibration dates and temperatures Values of exte
212. ormance with the use of a switching matrix to route signals between modules Complete automatic internal diagnostics both analog and digital confirm operational integrity Reference amplifiers maintain dc accuracy and stability Reference amplifiers have the lowest noise and best stability Reference amplifiers in the Calibrator go through special selection processes that include long term aging to ensure high reliability and performance well within specifications The Calibrator achieves its exceptional ac voltage accuracy by the use of a patented Fluke Calibration rms sensor to make real time ac dc comparison measurements The Fluke Calibration rms sensor is similar in principle to the traditional thermal voltage converter but has a shorter time constant virtually no reversal error higher signal to noise ratio and better frequency response In the Calibrator one Fluke Calibration rms sensor serves as an ac dc or ac ac transfer standard to develop gain and flatness correction constants during calibration The second Fluke Calibration rms sensor continuously monitors and corrects output voltage during operation A patented 26 bit digital to analog converter DAC lets the Calibrator precisely vary its output This is a pulse width modulated DAC with linearity typically better than 0 2 ppm of full scale As with the other internal functions the linearity of the DAC is automatically checked during calibration and analog diagnostics Specificat
213. pecifications However they can help to align the Calibrator closer to in house standards Before range calibration is done first do the Artifact Calibration as described later in this chapter This is to calibrate the ranges that will not be adjusted It also performs an initial adjustment for each range and supplies flatness corrections for ac functions DC Zeros DC Zeros is a quick automatic process that corrects offset errors that increase with time on several output ranges If a 5725A Amplifier is attached it also zeros the 11 A dc range This process takes approximately 2 1 2 minutes plus an additional 30 seconds for the 5725A Run DC Zeros 7 8 To execute dc zeros from the normal operation screen 1 Touch Setup Menu to show the Setup Menu See the Setup Menu section of Chapter 4 2 Touch the Calibration menu Operator Maintenance and Calibration T Calibration 3 Touch Run DC Zero to start the dc zeros routine The status of the dc zero calibration is shown as the Calibrator progresses through a series of steps When completed the Calibrator shows Calibration complete Note If the Calibrator is not warmed up the display prompts to continue or cancel the DC Zeros function 4 Touch Close to proceed with Calibrator use DC Zeros Reminder Specifications require that dc zeros be run at least every 30 days If 30 days passes and dc zeros is not done the display prompts to run the process To
214. plied current hhp117 eps Front Panel Operation 4 Set the Output In de current output the selections available at the bottom are e Current Output e External Guard e Boost e Wideband e Setup Menu In addition the Offset and Scale functions are available The output range can be locked in dc current Current Output selects one of three locations for non boosted current sourced by the Calibrator for example current output e OUTPUT binding post NORMAL which is the OUTPUT HI binding post also the default setting e AUX which is the AUX CURRENT OUTPUT binding post e 5725A which is the 5725A Amplifier binding posts The 5725A must be turned on but not necessarily activated Non boosted current from the Calibrator is not available at the 52120A amplifier binding posts 4 21 5730A Operators Manual 4 22 AC Current Output To set an ac current output 1 B1 0 n amp Make sure the Calibrator is in standby STANDBY annunciator lit Push if necessary If the UUT is not connected connect it now as described earlier in this chapter under Connect the Calibrator to a UUT Set the UUT to measure ac current on the appropriate range Enter a current magnitude with the numeric keypad Push or Kill if necessary Push Ey The display now shows the amplitude of the entry If an entry error is made push to clear the display then reenter the value If the most recent digit entered is in error
215. r Reference Change Calibration Password Generate Report Date Time Format Language Diagnostics Key Knob and Bell Tests hhp104 eps The subsequent list briefly describes the submenus available from the Setup Menu e Calibration The items in this submenu are used to activate calibration to external standards Calibration Check DC Zeros and to verify or adjust the 5730A Calibrator calibration to its specifications The Calibration submenu and process is explained in greater detail in Chapter 7 e Self Test amp Diagnostics Use this submenu to do automatic internal self diagnostics on various features of the Calibrator Once started the self diagnostic cannot be interrupted The Calibrator must be completely warmed up to run the self diagnostics or the process will timeout and prompt to let the Calibrator warm up The submenu also has a Key Knob and Bell Test that can be run from this point The key and knob test take input from the front panel keys and rotary knob and return visual identifiers that the key being pushed returns what it should For example if is pushed Enter is returned in the blank field of the submenu When Run Bell Test is pushed an internal bell will sound 4 46 Front Panel Operation 4 Set up the Calibrator e Instrument Setup Use this menu to e Choose and configure remote interfaces see Chapter 5 Set parameters to compute output uncertainty e Impose limits on the Calibrato
216. r from Table 5 4 String lt EOL gt range name gt lt points gt lt EOL gt mag 1 gt lt freq 1 gt lt offset 1 gt lt ashift 1 gt lt rshift 1 gt lt sshift 1 gt lt spec 1 gt lt EOL gt mag n gt lt freq n gt lt offset n gt lt ashift n gt lt rshift 1 gt lt sshift n gt lt spec n gt lt EOL gt Where lt range name gt Range identifier from Table 5 4 Response it points Integer Number of points for the range magn Float Magnitude for point n in range units freq n gt Float Frequency for point n in Hz offset n gt Float Zero shift for point n in range units ashift n gt Float Absolute shift for point n in range units lt rshift n gt Float Relative shift for point n ppm lt sshift n gt Float of spec shift for point n lt spec n gt Calibrator specification for point n in ppm Range units are the appropriate units for the range for example for all DC V ranges range units are V CAL SHIFT CAL DC220MV could return Exanmaa DC220MV 2 P 2 20E 1 0 00E 00 1 76E 07 1 97E 07 8 98E 01 7 10E 00 1 26E 01 2 20E 1 0 00E 00 1 58E 07 1 38E 07 6 26E 01 4 95E 00 1 26E 01 6 24 Remote Commands and Syntax 6 Commands Table 6 5 Commands cont 7 Sequential command Description A MET m Returns a group of calibration constant shifts due to a calibration activity CA L All output changes due to calibration Param ter CHECK All output changes due to calibra
217. r level transport standard A transfer standard that is rugged enough to allow shipment by common carrier to another location Appendices C Glossary true value Also called legal value the accepted consensus for example the correct value of the quantity being measured uncertainty The maximum difference between the accepted consensus or true value and the measured value of a quantity Uncertainty is normally expressed in units of ppm parts per million or as a percentage Accuracy is the same as 1 uncertainty units Symbols or names that define the measured quantities Examples of units are V mV A kW and dBm See also SI System of Units volt The unit of emf electromotive force or electrical potential in the SI system of units One volt is the difference of electrical potential between two points on a conductor carrying one ampere of current when the power being dissipated between these two points is equal to one watt watt The unit of power in the SI system of units One watt is the power required to do work at the rate of one joule second In terms of volts and ohms one watt is the power dissipated by one ampere flowing through a 1Q load wideband AC voltage at frequencies up to and including the radio frequency spectrum verification Checking the functional performance and uncertainty of an instrument or standard without making adjustments to it or changing its calibration constants voltage guar
218. r of days in the calibration cycle CAL INTV Sequential command Description Returns the calibration interval for main bap ve HH calibration Parameter EN UL Integer 1 90 180 or 365 the number of days in the calibration cycle CAL PASSWD Sequential command Ignored if not in remote Sets security password The Calibrator Description secure state must be set to off or an execution fault results p i 1 current security passcode quoted string consisting of up to 8 decimal digits arameter 2 new security passcode quoted string consisting of up to 8 decimal digits CAL PASSWD 5730 12345 Example Sets the security passcode to 12345 6 21 5730A Operators Manual 6 22 CAL_REF Parameter CAL_RNG Table 6 5 Commands cont Overlapped long term command ignored if not in remote Calibrates the internal references for the main output functions based on comparison to an externally applied standard To calibrate the Calibrator the controller must send a CAL_TEMP command a sequence of CAL_REF commands one for each external standard followed by a CAL_ADJ command then a CAL_STORE command These commands must be in the same sequence as in the example Note that the CAL_STORE command requires the security passcode To only collect performance data use this command without a CAL_STORE The true value of the external standard attached to the Calibrator binding posts The value and units of
219. r output for safety and external equipment protection e Select boost amplifiers for voltage and current outputs Enable or disable the ability to turn on or off ac transfers real time measurements and adjustments of the value after the output is settled e Choose the error reference value nominal or true value used to compute unit under test UUT errors The Instrument Setup submenu is explained in greater detail later in this chapter e Instrument Settings Use this menu to e Set the date and time as well as its format e Select the user interface language e Control the display brightness The Instrument Settings menu is explained in greater detail later in this chapter e About this Instrument This shows hardware configuration and software version information for the Calibrator Nothing can be changed from this section Setup Menu Rules Each menu has a path shown at the top of the display that shows the current location in the menu structure This gives access to the menus used to get the present point For example if Setup Menu is touched from the normal operation screen the top of the Setup Menu shows This type of symbol designates the top level of the menu structure For this manual menu paths are shown as in the subsequent example to reach the Remote Port menu Setup Menu gt Instrument Setup gt Remote Port This example shows the path to this Remote Port section of the menu structure Setup Menu was the star
220. rator is calibrated e The internal ac dc transfer standard is never adjusted so its traceability is not disturbed by calibration Infrequent verification is done in the traditional way by comparing selected ac voltage outputs with an external dc voltage standard through an external ac dc transfer standard Fluke Calibration recommends this to be done every two years or as determined by the policy of your organization e Infrequent independent verification is also done on stable parameters such as frequency flatness determined more by circuit geometry and dielectric constants than time Calibration Reports The 5730A Calibrator stores two sets of calibration constants the set currently in use and the old set from the previous calibration This gives the Calibrator the ability at any time to produce a calibration report of the differences between the present settings and the settings that were in effect before the last calibration The report shows shifts in various output values from before to after the most recent calibration for each range and function in ppm of range and in percentage of specification limit The report can be saved to a USB drive or retrieve it from a host computer through either the RS 232 USB device port Ethernet port or IEEE 488 interface Range Adjustment After calibration further fine adjustments can be made to each range Range adjustments are optional and they are not necessary to meet total uncertainty s
221. rators Manual Clean the Air Filter ACaution Damage caused by overheating can occur if the area around the fan is restricted the intake air is too warm or the air filter becomes clogged To prevent Product damage make sure that the filter is completely dry before reinstallation The air filter must be removed and cleaned at least every 30 days or more frequently if the Calibrator is operated in a dusty environment The air filter is accessible from the rear panel of the Calibrator To clean the air filter refer to Figure 7 2 1 Disconnect line power 2 Unscrew the knurled screw at the top of the air filter and pull the filter retainer downwards it is hinged at the bottom to remove the filter Clean the filter by washing it in soapy water Rinse and dry it thoroughly 4 Reinstall the filter and the knurled screw hhp026 eps Figure 7 2 Air Filter Access Operator Maintenance and Calibration T Clean the Exterior Clean the Exterior To keep the 5730A Calibrator looking new clean the case front panel keys and display with a soft cloth slightly dampened with either water or a non abrasive mild cleaning solution that is not harmful to plastics ACaution Do not use aromatic hydrocarbons or chlorinated solvents for cleaning They can damage the plastic materials used in the Product User Replaceable Parts User replaceable parts are listed in Table 7 2 and shown
222. re 1 1 Product Dimensions Artifact Calibration Standards Requirements The following external standards are necessary to calibrate the 5730A to the listed specification Each external standard used must have an accuracy equal to or less than the listed uncertainty limit Fluke Standard seras Nominal Value Uncertainty Limit 130A By Nerd is 732B Voltage 10V 1 5 ppm dc volts ac volts dc current ac current 7T42A 1 Resistance 1Q 10 ppm 10 1 9Q 742A 10k Resistance 10 KQ 2 ppm ac current dc current 10 O to 100 MQ Introduction and Specifications 1 Electrical Specifications Electrical Specifications Note Fluke guarantees performance verification using specifications stated to 99 confidence level DC Voltage Specifications 5730A DC Voltage Specifications Absolute Accuracy 5 C from calibration temperature 24Hours 90Days 180Days iYear 24Hours 90 Days ppm output uV Relative Accuracy 1 C Resolution 99 Confidence Level 220 mV 10 nv 5 0 5 7 0 5 8 0 5 9 0 5 2 0 4 2 5 0 4 2 2V 100 nV 3 5 0 8 4 0 8 4 5 0 8 6 0 8 2 0 8 2 5 0 8 11V 1uV 2 543 3 3 3 5 3 4 3 1 3 1 5 3 22 V 1 uV 2 5 5 3 5 3 5 5 4 5 1 5 1 5 5 220 V 10 uV 3 5 50 4 50 5450 6 50 2450 2 5 50 1100 V 100 uV 5 500 6 500 7 500 8 500 2 5 400 3 400 95 Confidence Level 220 mV 10 nV 4 0 4 6 0 4 6 5 0 4 7 5 0 4 1 6 0 4 2 0 4 2 2V 100 nV 3 0 7 3 5 0 7 4 0 7 5 0 7 1 6 0 7 2 0 7 11V 1uV 27
223. requency is not zero When the rotary knob is turned the highlighted digit increments or decrements Turn the knob clockwise to make the number more positive Turn the knob counterclockwise to make the number more negative As a digit is incremented past 9 or a digit is decremented past 0 the adjacent digit is carried Ell and W select digits to the right and left and selects the upper line amplitude and lower line frequency If the output is adjusted beyond the capability of the Calibrator the Calibrator beeps and does not allow the change Push and Af to quickly verify the accuracy of different ranges of a UUT When in error mode and these keys are pushed the Calibrator output and the new reference are set to 10 times or 1 10 the previous reference value In the resistance output function the edit controls show the UUT error in a similar way except the output of the Calibrator does not change as the knob is turned Instead a reading on the display changes that can be matched to the reading on the UUT As the reading is changed the Calibrator computes and displays UUT error Read the UUT Error AC and DC Voltage and Current Output To read the error of the UUT in the ac and dc voltage and current output functions l Set the necessary calibration voltage or current as previously described under Set the Output 2 Use the output adjustment controls as necessary to get a reading on the UUT equal to the original entry on
224. rings include leading and trailing quotation marks See Table 5 2 for details Input Buffer Operation As the 5730A Calibrator receives each data byte from the controller it places the bytes in a portion of memory called the input buffer The input buffer holds up to 128 data bytes and operates in a first in first out fashion The Calibrator treats the EOI IEEE 488 control line as a separate data byte and inserts it into the input buffer if it is encountered as part of a message terminator Input buffer operation is transparent to the program running on the controller If the controller sends commands faster than the Calibrator can process them the input buffer fills to capacity When the input buffer is full the Calibrator holds off the IEEE 488 bus with the NRFD Not Ready For Data handshake line When the Calibrator has processed a data byte from the full input buffer it then completes the handshake allowing the controller to send another data byte The Calibrator clears the input buffer on power up and on receiving the DCL Device Clear or SDC Selected Device Clear messages from the controller Under RS 232C serial port remote control that uses Control S XOFF protocol the Calibrator issues a Control S XOFF when the input buffer becomes 80 full The Calibrator issues a Control Q XON when it has read enough of the input buffer so that it is less than 40 full When RTS Request to Send protocol is used the serial interfa
225. rnally calibrated internal references DC voltage output shifts for each range AC voltage output shifts for each range AC and dc current output shifts for each range Resistance shifts for each value 5725A Boost Amplifier output shifts if attached The calibration report file name is CKyymmdd CSV where yymmdd is the date today Raw Data Results This report gives the values for the internally stored correction factors calibration constants and is useful primarily for our service centers 7 23 5730A Operators Manual 7 24 Chapter 8 Options and Accessories Title Page Introd ctlOD 2 sess itec ES E ON tot te E ag D epe a tn Ec ta E ERE 8 3 Wideband AC Voltage Module Option 5700A 03 eee 8 3 ACCOSSOFIGS cn etude eerie ed Cerere eee Cree E reete A ade Bae eed ote 8 3 Low Thermal EMF Test Leads essen 8 4 Rack Mount Kits 1 i iniit dicio od b Iiic ed UD cl daageseabaateessatacss 8 4 Shielded IEEE 488 Interface Cables Y8021 and Y8022 8 4 DC Voltage Reference Standard 732B sse 8 4 1 Q and 10 KQ Resistance Standards 742A 1 and 742A 10k 8 5 23125 Amplifier boe ete Hee hec et pet bise polis 8 5 32120 XX Amplifier tei tote Pate CE temer die ite ete Poet Dea 8 5 5730A Operators Manual 8 2 Options and Accessories 8 Introduction Introduction This chapter describes options and accessories av
226. rol Setup Procedure 1 Turn on the 5730A Calibrator 2 Touch Setup Menu gt Instrument Setup gt Remote Port 3 The RS 232 setup details are shown in the RS 232 Setup region To change any of these select the region See section Set up and Connect the Serial Interface section for more 4 Ifthe Active Remote Port is not RS 232 touch Active Remote gt RS 232 5 Touch Exit to exit the Setup Menu Exceptions for Serial Remote Control When the RS 232 port is used to remotely control the 5730A Calibrator either interactively with a terminal or under computer control operation is the same as with an IEEE 488 controller connected to the IEEE 488 port for control These are exceptions Control C does the same function as DCL Device Clear or SDC Selected Device Clear 2 The EOL End of Line input terminator is Carriage Return Control M or Line Feed Control L All output lines are terminated by the terminator programmed in a setup menu or set with the remote command SP SET This setting applies to all lines including those with the PUD command see number 4 3 Control R echoes to the port a Carriage Return a Line Feed and any uncompleted remote command entered This shows a copy of whatever has been entered since the last command 4 Forthe PUD Protected User Data Command that stores characters for later recall 5 7 5730A Operators Manual the serial remote interface does not store the subsequent chara
227. rom Inguard 1503 Bad Control Byte From Inguard 1600 Level Faults Guard Crossing Transmit 1600 Multiple Timeouts Sending To Inguard 1601 Inguard Request Reset Loop 1602 Unexpected NSA From Inguard 1603 Bad Packet Number In ACK From Inguard 1604 Bad Control Byte From Inguard Rev Task 1605 Illegal Inguard Transmit Task State 1606 Inguard Indefinite ACKWAIT Holdoff 5730A Operators Manual 1700 Level Faults Guard Crossing Utility 1700 Serial Write Failure To Inguard 1701 Packet Too Large For Inguard 1800 Level Faults Normal Output Operations 1800 DORMANT To OPERATE 1801 Bad Transition Type 1802 Bad Boolean Selector 1803 NRMrngStby Encountered Error 1804 DCV Called For Non DCV Range 1805 ACV Called For Non ACV Range 1806 Bad ACV Frequency Range 1807 Hi Res Frequency Too High 1808 ACV Amplitude Correction Failure 1809 Cannot Phase Lock To Signal 1810 Bad Phase Quadrant 1811 Current Called for Non Current Range 1812 Ohms Called for Non Ohms Range 1813 Cannot Phase Lock Output Not AC 1814 Cannot Phase Shift Output Not AC 1815 Bad Wide Band Range 1816 Frequency Too High Even For Wide Band 1817 Illegal Current Output Location 1818 Output Current Out Of Tolerance 1819 Current Compliance Voltage Exceeded 1820 2 Wire Compensation Current Exceeded 1821 NRMbstcur Passed Bad Range 1826 5725 No Longer Connected 1
228. rty Error odit Pe n eines thas ee n dating 4 39 4 10 Meter Response vs Stimulus 4 42 6 1 Overview of Status Data Structure eene enn 6 53 J 1 Access the FUSE doe ette tie e aite er aedes ee n ae e b eoe Cae 7 3 eds Air Filter ACGeSS uet tetro ed Gn EI Ot ear peste 7 4 4 3 Replaceable Patts conie ee e e tete eae 7 6 7 4 732B External Calibration Connections eese enne 7 12 7 6 220 V DC Range Calibration Connections 00 0 0 cece ceecceseeereeeneeeeecnseceseenseenseeees 7 17 7 7 Wideband Module Calibration Connection cccccccscccccceceesesscecesececeessrssaeeeeees 7 18 xiii 5730A Operators Manual xiv Chapter 1 Introduction and Specifications Title Page IntrOGduCtiOr i od Hte dete HR ET Meet a ded e ect etic ethas 1 5 Satety Information 5 re ee eee de ee eet bee dto ut Ee EE eee 1 7 ymbols entem ae eee 1 8 How to Contact Fluke Calibration esee ene 1 9 Instruction Manuals fedet eei Ree OR evade meee te ird 1 9 Wideband AC Voltage Module Option 5700A 03 sese 1 10 Auxiliaty Amplitiers aid atender tes Ente le Pe ED bedstead 1 10 23725 AMPUEN esiteini aceti t tet ee oec obe tbc tet eee boe 1 11 52120 Amplifier otii eoe et tee Dena ne eve rg 1 11 Support Equipment and Services seen 1 11 732B Direct Voltage Reference Standard sese 1 12 732B 200 Direct Volt Maintenance Program USA Only
229. rval Boost Amplification Types Confidence Level ACxfer Choice Error Reference hhp105 eps The list below briefly describes submenus accessed by each touch screen selection These items are described in more detail later in this chapter Remote Port Setup opens setup menus for the IEEE 488 instrument control port and the RS 232 serial interface port Chapter 5 describes how to set up the IEEE 488 interface and the serial interface Uncertainty Information set the confidence level and calibration interval on which uncertainty specifications are calculated Error Reference When the output value is edited the display shows the difference between the reference value and the edit value This is explained in more detail later in this chapter Output Limits limit the possible voltage or current output of the Calibrator for safety or to protect external equipment Source Hardware select external boost amplifiers for high ac voltage and current outputs and also allows ac dc transfers to be turned off once the output is settled The AC Transfer Choice ACxfer Choice feature activates ACxfer Off when in the ac voltage or current output function This turns off the monitoring system that makes adjustments for load changes The AC Transfer Off feature is available only in ranges below 220 V at frequencies below 120 kHz Front Panel Operation 4 Instrument Setup AC Transfer Off stays active until the Calibrator is reset or the
230. s SP_EOF Sets the End Of File EOF string SP_EOF Returns the End Of File EOF string Sets baud terminal or computer mode stall method data bits stop bits SP_SET parity and End Of Line EOL string Returns baud rate terminal or computer mode stall method data bits stop bits parity and End Of Line EOL string SP_SET 5730A Operators Manual Table 6 4 Command Summary by Function cont CAL_CONF Sets the calibration specifications to a confidence level of either 95 or 99 CAL RCSV Returns a comma separated value format report similar to what is saved on i a USB flash drive Remote Commands and Syntax 6 Commands Table 6 4 Command Summary by Function cont Calibration Testing and Diagnostics Commands for the Calibrator cont DIAGFLT Sets the Calibrator response to faults in remote diagnostics DIAGFLT Returns the Calibrator response to faults in remote diagnostics OHMSREF Returned calculated resistance reference Main software revision H and after TST Checks the nonvolatile storage area calibration constants and instrument settings 5730A Operators Manual Table 6 5 Commands ADDR Description Sequential command Ignored if not in remote Sets the GPIB interface bus address Parameter Bus address ADDR 4 Example Sets the GPIB interface bus address to 4 ADDR Sequential command Gets the GPIB interface bus address Parameter None Respon
231. s cleared 19 9 V 19 903 V 1 1 000151 19 9 V Extending this example if the Calibrator is now set to 10 V the actual output shown on the display is 10 00151 V 4 41 5730A Operators Manual Linearity Check with Offset and Scale With the 5730A Calibrator offset and scaling features a UUT offset and scale errors can be removed to isolate and display linearity error The subsequent procedure is an example that uses the Offset and Scale selection to determine both scale and linearity error of a 4 1 2 digit DMM In this example the DMM is set to the 20 V dc range and the Calibrator is connected to the DMM Figure 4 10 illustrates all three types of errors that are detected by the Calibrator The numbers in the graph correspond to the conditions encountered in the example Linear Response 19 9017 Scale Error 19 9000 19 8987 Actual Meter Calibrator Voltage Respaniee Linearity 10 000208 Error 9 993208 Offset Error gt 10 000 10 007 1 3 mV Meter Reading hhp020 eps Figure 4 10 Meter Response vs Stimulus 1 Set the Calibrator to 0 mV in standby 2 Use the output adjustment controls the rotary knob and EID to adjust the Calibrator output for a reading of 0 V on the DMM The displays shows 12 21 12 10 52am 3 1 year 213 days since calibration Standby 1 230000 mv Reference Error 0 00000 mV gt 999 9999 hhp136 eps 4 42 Front Panel
232. s from the network administrator The LAN Subnet Mask is a 32 bit number This number is represented as four 3 digit segment numbers on the front panel display The default subnet mask set at the factory is 255 255 254 0 To change the Calibrator subnet mask 1 Touch Setup Menu gt Instrument Setup Remote Port gt Ethernet Setup to get to the Ethernet Setup menu 2 Touch Subnet 3 Use the numeric keypad to enter the subnet mask and then push ELEGY If a mistake is made when the subnet mask is entered push and go back to step 3 to enter the address again Read the MAC Address 5 10 The MAC Address is set at the factory and cannot be changed The MAC address can be read from the Ethernet Setup menu The MAC address can also be accessed with a remote connection that uses the MACADDR remote command Remote Interface Setup Establish an Ethernet Connection Establish an Ethernet Connection Telnet is the easiest method of establishing an Ethernet connection with the 5730A Calibrator Telnet is a client server protocol based on TCP The Telnet Protocol provides a fairly general bi directional eight bit byte oriented communications method Telnet is available on all UNIX servers and on most PCs Telnet clients typically connect to hosts on socket port 23 The LAN connection to the Calibrator must be established with the specified Network Socket Port See the Configure the General Network Socket Port section When the remot
233. s sine wave signal intended for a 3 KQ load The phase of this signal can be adjusted with the 4 arrow keys and rotary knob or by remote commands to lead or lag the main Calibrator output signal by up to 180 degrees The connector shell is VARIABLE PHASE not connected directly to chassis ground It is connected internally to the OUT BNC Connector OUTPUT LO binding post The maximum allowable potential between the connector shell and chassis ground is 20 V peak Refer to Variable Phase Output in Chapter 4 for details 5730A Operators Manual Table 3 2 Rear Panel Features cont pte scription ooo Provides the input for an external signal onto which the Calibrator can be 5 phase locked 1 V rms to 10 V rms 10 kQ input impedance The PHASE LOCK IN connector shell is not connected directly to chassis ground It is connected Q internally to the OUTPUT LO binding post The maximum allowable BNC Connector potential between the connector shell and chassis ground is 20 V peak Refer to Phase Locking to an External Signal in Chapter 4 for details AC PWR INPUT A grounded male three prong connector that accepts the mains power cord Connector D This switch must be in the ON I position before the soft power button on Master ON OFF Switch the front panel will function Line power fuse Refer to Fuse Replacement in Chapter 7 for fuse rating F1 Fuse Holder information and the fuse replacement procedure A binding post that is
234. s to 120 A rms 10 Hz to 10 kHz 1 Up to three 52120As may be connected providing a total current of up to 300 A dc or 360 A rms Introduction and Specifications 1 Support Equipment and Services 5725A Amplifier The Fluke Calibration 5725A Amplifier is an external unit that operates under calibrator control It extends ac voltage drive capabilities and both ac and dc current output range The amplifier adds these capabilities to the 1100 V ac range of the 5730A Calibrator with no compromise in accuracy e Frequency limits at higher voltage increase to 100 kHz at 750 V 30 kHz at 1100 V e Load limit increases to 70 mA for frequencies above 5 kHz e Capacitive drive increases to 1000 pF subject to the maximum output current A separate set of binding posts on the front panel of the 5725A supplies extended range ac and de current outputs Since most meters have a separate input terminal for the high current ranges this eliminates the need to change cables during a procedure The 5725A can also be configured to source all current both standard calibrator generated current and its own current through the 5725A binding posts 52120A Amplifier The Fluke Calibration 52120A Transconductance Amplifier is an external unit that operates under calibrator control to extend the ac and dc current output range of the 5730A Calibrator A maximum of three 52120A amplifiers can be connected as much as tripling the current output available The 5
235. se Integer ADDR Example Um Returns 4 if the gpib interface bus address is set to 4 ADJOUT Sequential Command Returns the adjusted output magnitude and frequency The adjusted output magnitude is the output after modification by the front panel knob or the INCR remote command In all Description output functions but resistance ADJOUT behaves exactly like OUT In the resistance function OUT returns the actual Calibrator output which cannot be adjusted and ADJOUT returns what would be the reading on the Display in direct operation The frequency is always the present output frequency Float Output amplitude Response String Units V DBM A or OHM Float Frequency 0 if dc or ohms 1 256983E 01 V 0 12 56983V Example 1 883E 01 A 4 42E 02 188 3 mA 442 Hz 1 9E 06 0HM 0 1 9 MQ BOOST Overlapped Command ignored if not in remote Description Activates and deactivates an accessory amplifier ON Activates the appropriate amplifier for the type of output Parameter OFF Deactivates the active amplifier BOOST ON Example Activates the appropriate amplifier if the last OUT command selected an output supported by the attached amplifier Remote Commands and Syntax 6 Commands Table 6 5 Commands cont BRIGHTNESS Sets the brightness of the GUI display Integer 0 to 100 where 0 is dimmest and 100 is brightest E BRIGHTNESS 50 ampie Sets the display to half brightness the default value
236. se for the wideband function decibel levels are computed for a 50 Qload and for the standard ac function decibel levels are computed for a 600 2 load Variable Phase Output A variable phase signal of nominally 2 5 V rms is available at the rear panel BNC connector labeled VARIABLE PHASE OUT when sourcing ac volts wideband voltage or ac current outputs The phase of this signal with respect to the main output signal is continuously adjustable from 180 to 180 in 1 increments The rotary knob numeric keypad and selections adjust the phase of this signal after calling up the phase controls as described below The display shows the phase of the phase output signal as a number and a cursor on a linear scale graduated in 90 steps from 180 to 180 To set and adjust a phase output 1 Set an ac voltage or current output as described under AC Voltage Output or AC Current Output 2 Touch the icon on the right of the display above the bottom row of selections to expose the phase controls 3 Touch Phase Control This exposes the phase entry window To turn phase shift output on touch the checkbox 4 29 5730A Operators Manual 5 The phase can now be changed by entering a value with the numeric keypad turning the knob or touching a point on the phase scale 3 14 2013 10 52am 62 0 ppm 1 year 213 days since calibration Standby ADDR 1 000000 v 1 0000 kHz Phase Lock Internal Phase Output Ad
237. sent it can cause the Calibrator to wait until the output has settled before continuing on to the next command by following OUT with a WAI Example command This is useful because OUT is an overlapped command which means the Calibrator would normally go on to process other commands before completing the OUT command WBAND Overlapped command ignored if not in remote Description Activates or deactivates output from the Wideband AC Module Option 5700A 03 This has the same action as touching the wideband selection from the front panel during local operation XFER Turns ac dc transfers off or on after output has settled OFF or ON XFER OFF turns transfers off ON is the default XFER Returns whether ac dc transfers after settling are turned on ON or OFF XFERCHOICE s Sets whether the choice to turn ac dc transfers off is given on the front panel GUI for Description ac V outputs XFERCHOICE OFF omits the choice from the front panel this is the default setting XFERCHOICE ae Returns whether the choice to turn ac dc transfers off is given on the front panel GUI for Description ac V outputs 6 48 Remote Commands and Syntax Commands 6 Table 6 6 Serial Remote Control Commands LOCAL Description Parameter LOCKOUT Description Parameter REMOTE Description Parameter Sequential command Enables the local state This command duplicates the IEEE 488 GTL Go to Local message No
238. signal from a capacitive leakage path to ground DAC digital to analog converter A device or circuit that converts a digital waveform to an analog voltage dBm Power level expressed as decibels above or below 1 mW derived units Units in the SI system that are derived from base units Volts ohms and watts are derived from amperes and other base and derived units distortion Undesired changes in the waveform of a signal Harmonic distortion disturbs the original relationship between a frequency and other frequencies naturally related to it Intermodulation distortion imp introduces new frequencies by the mixing of two or more original frequencies Other forms of distortion are phase distortion and transient distortion errors The different types of errors described in this glossary are offset error linearity error random error scale error systematic errors and transfer error Each of these are defined in this glossary flatness A measure of the variation of the actual output an ac voltage source at different frequency points when set to the same nominal output level A flat voltage source exhibits very little error throughout its frequency range floor The part of the uncertainty specification of an instrument that is typically a fixed offset plus noise Floor can be expressed as units such as microvolts or counts of the least significant digit For the Calibrator the floor specification is combined with fixed range
239. t C Fault 3104 A15 HV Oven Regulation Fault 3105 A15 HV Oven Regulation Fault 3106 A15 DC HV Amp Noise Fault 3107 A15 DC HV Amp Offset Fault 3108 A15 DC HV Amp Gain Fault 3109 A15 HV DC Preamplifier Fault 3110 A15 HV DC Series Pass amp Current Fault 3111 A15 HV DC High Voltage Output Fault 3112 A15 HV DC Ref Error Amplitude Fault 3113 A15 HV DC Preamplifier Fault 3114 A15 HV DC Series Pass amp Current Fault 3115 A15 HV DC High Voltage output Fault 3116 A15 HV DC Reference Error Amp Fault 3117 A14 A15 HV DC Current Error Amp Fault 3118 A14 A15 HV DC Current Error Amp Fault 3119 A14 A15 HV DC Current Abs Value 3120 A14 A15 HV DC Current Abs Value 3122 A14 A15 HV AC 1 KHZ Preamp Fault lo 3123 A14 A15 HV AC 1 KHZ Preamp Fault mid 3124 A14 A15 HV AC 1 KHZ Preamp Fault hi 3125 A14 A15 HV AC 100 HZ Preamp Fault lo 3126 A14 A15 HV AC 100 HZ Preamp Fault Appendices Fault Codes A 3127 A14 A15 HV AC 100 HZ Preamp Fault hi 3128 A14 A15 HV AC 1 KHZ Output Fault lo 3129 A14 A15 HV AC 1 KHZ Output Fault mid 3130 A14 A15 HV AC 1 KHZ Output Fault hi 3131 A14 A15 HV AC 100 HZ Output Fault lo 3132 A14 A15 HV AC 100 HZ Output Fault mid 3133 A14 A15 HV AC 100 HZ Output Fault hi 3135 Assembly A14 Not Responding 3136 A14 8255 Was Reset 3137 A14 A15 A16 2
240. t any of the following State of the IEEE 488 interface Selected bus address Status Register Enable setting Contents of nonvolatile memory RST also re secures the Calibrator security state to ON SCALE AE Sequential command ignored if not in remote Description i Turns scaling on or off The same as touching the Scale indicator on the display SCALE Sequential command Description Returns the full scale nominal and full scale actual values set when SCALE more was turned on If scaling is off both responses one and two are 0 0 Float Nominal full scale value Responses J Float Actual full scale value f String V A or DBM units for the first two responses SCAL_ERR e Sequential command Description d Returns the value of the scale error if scaling is on otherwise this command returns 0 0 Parameter None 1 Float Scale error Response 2 String Units for scale error 6 43 5730A Operators Manual Table 6 5 Commands cont SP_EOF Sequential command ignored if not in remote Description Sets the End Of File character string for the RS 232 C serial interface The EOF setting is saved when the power is turned off 1 ASCII code decimal for the first character Parameter 2 ASCII code decimal for the second character A 0 for parameter 1 or 2 means that there is no character in that position SP EOF Sequential command Description Returns the End Of Fi
241. t device including overrange capability scale error Same as gain error Scale or gain error results when the slope of the meter s response curve is not exactly 1 A meter with only scale error no offset or linearity error will read 0 V with 0 V applied but something other than 10 V with 10 V applied secondary standard A standard maintained by comparison against a primary standard sensitivity The degree of response of a measuring device to the change in input quantity or a figure of merit that expresses the ability of a measurement system or device to respond to an input quantity shield A grounded covering device designed to protect a circuit or cable from electromagnetic interference SI System of Units The accepted International System of Units See also units base units and derived units stability A measure of the freedom from drift in value over time and over changes in other variables such as temperature Note that stability is not the same as uncertainty 5730A Operators Manual standard A device that is used as an exact value for reference and comparison standard cell A primary cell that serves as a standard of voltage The term standard cell often refers to a Weston normal cell which is a wet cell with a mercury anode a cadmium mercury amalgam cathode and a cadmium sulfate solution as the electrolyte systematic errors Errors in repeated measurement results that remain constant or vary
242. t magnitude and frequency the output range and whether the Calibrator is in STANDBY or OPERATE a U is shown when the output is unsettled and not yet within specifications an external phase lock indicator is shown a phase output signal indicator various references and error amounts when error mode scale or offset are active an ADDR indicator if the GPIB interface is active and the Calibrator is currently being addressed The range indicator shows the range and if the range is locked If it is possible to lock the range there is a gold dot at the left of the range indicator Pushing this dot toggles between auto ranging and locked range This section has touchscreen selections Touch the plus sign to show e Scale e Offset e Phase Control When a value is entered a field opens that shows the value in progress as it is entered A menu of the touchscreen selections The selections shown depend on the output function and value 5730A Operators Manual 4 16 For the selections with indicators the value shown is the value now in effect For example if the External Guard selections says OFF then external guard is off and touching the selection will turn it on To set the output push this key sequence to select an output function and amplitude numeric keys multiplier function ENES For example to set the output to 10 mV dc push EBON m v ENTER To set an ac output push these additional keys
243. t point then Instrument Setup was touched and finally Remote Port was touched to get to the Remote Port menu Conversely from the Remote Port menu touch Instrument Setup to go up one level Setup Menu to go up two levels An Exit or Cancel selection in the lower right of the display closes the menus or stops a process The 5730A Calibrator then returns to the normal operation screen 4 47 5730A Operators Manual Menu Description A menu item that leads to a submenu with multiple selections has a black and amber title bar on top followed by a list of the items in the submenu The Instrument Setup menu is shown in this example Remote Port Uncertainty Information Output Limits Sourcing Hardware To get to the submenus touch anywhere in the menu shown Touchscreen Selections When applicable settings controlled by touchscreen selections are shown in this manner hhp149 eps Each of the touchscreen selections shown above change a parameter or reveal more changeable parameters 4 48 Front Panel Operation Set up the Calibrator 4 Some selections do not have submenus beneath them or do not include changeable items For example in the display below the About this Instrument selection has no changeable items DC Zero Artifact Calibration Calibration Check Wideband Gain Calibration Wideband Flatness Calibration Change Calibration Password Range Adjustment Generate Report Diagnosti
244. td e RO RR E REDDE 6 54 Event Status Register i t HR CE LITE Pe HEP PRI d ende 6 55 Bit Assignments for the ESR and ESE sese 6 55 Readthe ESR and ESE 55 d eee deett Re eh he 6 56 Load the ESE 4 5 2 cepi Oro euro Heidi 6 56 Instrument Status Register eee nre ren 6 56 Instrument Status Change Register eeeeeeeeenen ene 6 56 Instrument Status Change Enable Register eee 6 56 Bit Assignments for the ISR ISCR and ISCE sess 6 56 Read the ISR ISCR or ISCE niteat e cicer e reae La 6 57 Load the SCE Svc 15 Re b Te Ee iE edo Deren Pee tug 6 57 Baul Queue a t edet eset e te reote o edet ed e ea T 6 57 5730A Operators Manual 6 2 Remote Commands and Syntax 6 Introduction Introduction The syntax rules in this chapter apply to all the remote commands A command consists of a word by itself or a word followed by one or more parameters The rules for parameter syntax are provided first including proper usage of units and multipliers followed by the rules for extra spaces then followed by the rules for terminator usage A description of how the 5730A Calibrator processes incoming characters provides the basis for answering other possible questions about syntax Information about syntax of response messages is also given Parameter Syntax Rules Many of the remote commands require parameters which must be used properly to prevent com
245. te awe e ite 4 46 Setup Menu Rules 5 4 ede eet Rer e ete debeo 4 47 Menu Descriptio 5 et eed cec o o Ree rie aes 4 48 Touchscreen Selections uc eiecti bete tee e retient 4 48 Instrument Setup oreren eere tee 4 52 Uncertainty Information Menu sese 4 53 Set Output Limits ancien dete Sted tene cie t iet erts REC 4 54 Select Boost Amplifiers teo eret tme tete eet Re a 4 55 Error Reference 3 ore eoe eter Gd terre teta 4 55 Instr ment Settings 2 eet esiste tc ce iae te cere PHI peni reet dea 4 57 Set the Internal Clock Calendar eene 4 57 Can Sula ce ir sos metet natant tes eris tees deu sev oe ee dorid de 4 58 Display Brightness diee ee E dede etie thee ted 4 58 About This Instrument eere ten teer e caen iter aieo 4 58 Remote Interface Setup eese nnns 5 1 Introduction iat iu aie neh ees 5 3 GPIB TEEE 488 Interface seessssseseseeseee eene enne enne enne en 5 3 Use the IEEE 488 Port for Remote Control eee 5 3 TEEE 488 Bus Restrictions eese eren 5 3 Bus Set p Procedure diei edocet eee 5 4 TEEE 488 Interface Configuration eese 5 4 Bus Communication Overview eese eren enne 5 5 RS2232 Serial Interface on te Bee tt eee 5 5 Use the RS 232 Port for Remote Control eee 5 5 RS 232 Interface Specifications eeeeeeeeeeeeeeen ne
246. te nete Ree ee eda 2 6 Fe8tUf BS oscar voee Vespa COR seva Prix vs ark Vno aES e RUE R TRA SMR FUE E eS n 3 1 Introduction 2 te ae P e tte te Hte Lee etes p Ene ges oe c ie Eee ite 3 3 Eront Panel Features dte at beet ata dee esee eshte 3 3 Rear Panel Feature Siei 2c Ad ede Ge ete Miren 3 7 Front Panel Operation eeeeeeeeeeeeee eene nnennn nnn nnn 4 1 InttOdUctlon eei ederet t eee av begs ice ree iere eee 4 3 Turn on th Calibratot 3 idee etc inris ehe as 4 3 Warmup En 4 4 Product Uses RU RE ER COR PRSE B ee ERS 4 4 Reset the Calibrator ecrire he ne reete ere ee tries 4 4 Operate and Standby Modes sse nennen 4 4 Connect the Calibrator to a UUT ssesssessseseseeeeeeeeenenee enne enne 4 5 Recommended Cable and Connector Types eese 4 5 When to Use External Sensing eeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeerenren ene nen 4 7 When to Use the External Voltage Guard eee 4 7 Four Wire Vs Two Wire Resistance Connections ssess 4 7 Cable Connection Instructions eeessseeseeeeseeeeee enne eene 4 8 setithe Outputs egest th tre een RP cepe te eire pea 4 15 DC Voltage Output ater eee eee etie rir eere de e te bet en ed iUn 4 17 AC Voltage Output 5 ente ee et eee teer PE e eerte 4 18 DC Current Output eee eee cedo eere tee e eae be eee edd 4 20 AC Current OUtput 2 22 0 edem nde ein eh eae 4 22
247. te remotely with the CLOCK and CLOCK commands and for displaying calibration dates on the front panel and in calibration reports MDY Display MM DD YY remote and front panel entry MMDDYY Parameter DMY Display DD MM YY remote and front panel entry DDMMYY YMD Display YYMMDD remote and front panel entry YYMMDD DATEFMT Returns the date format setting see DATEFMT for its applications String MDY Display MM DD YY date entry MMDDYY Response DMY Display DD MM YY date entry DDMMYY or YMD Display YYMMDD date entry YYMMDD DBMOUT Sequential command Description Same as OUT except that if output is ac V the returned magnitude is converted to dBm for the appropriate load 50Q for wideband 600 Q standard ac V Parameter None Float Output value Response String Units DBM V A or OHM Float Frequency 0 if dc or ohms 1 256983E 01 V 0 12 56983 V Example 2 4203670E 01 DBM 4 4200E 02 1 9E 06 0HM 0 1 9 MQ 6 28 Remote Commands and Syntax 6 Commands Table 6 5 Commands cont DHCP Description Sequential command Ignored if not in remote Enables disables DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for LAN operation Parameter ON enables DHCP operation OFF disables DHCP operation DHCP Description Sequential command Returns the current state of the DHCP configuration Parameter None Response String Example DP P Returns ON if DHCP is enabled Overlapped l
248. ted to the end of its standard equipment output cable Auxiliary Amplifiers The Fluke Calibration Model 5725A and 52120A amplifiers are available to extend the high voltage performance and current range of the 5730A Calibrator Interface connectors on the Calibrator rear panel accept cables to directly operate a 5725A and or 52120A Multiple amplifiers can be connected to the Calibrator at the same time but only one output can be active at a time Once the amplifiers are connected and configured in the Product Setup Menu amplifier operation is controlled by the Calibrator A maximum of three 52120As can be connected to provide a maximum of 360 A rms ac or 300 A dc current when their outputs are connected in parallel See Chapter 4 for instructions to operate both amplifiers The general specifications at the end of this chapter include specifications to operate the 5730A Calibrator with both amplifiers For other amplifier specifications refer to their instruction manuals Table 1 2 summarizes the extended capabilities offered by the 5725A and 52120A Brief descriptions of the extended capabilities follow Table 1 2 Auxiliary Amplifier Data 20 V rms to 1100 V rms up to 70 mA 40 Hz to 30 kHz 50 mA 5 kHz 220 V rms to 750 V rms up to 70 mA 30 kHz to 5725A Amplifier 100 kHz AC Volts DC Amps 0 A to 11 A AC Amps 1 A rms to 11 A rms 40 Hz to 10 kHz 52120A DC Amps O A to 100 A Transconductance Amplifier AC Amps 0 2 A rm
249. ternal Clock Calendar eene 4 57 Ganga TT 4 58 Display Brightness ote eene o etes te ete tenes ages 4 58 About This Instt ment x ect esse weds eoceteee ette teet eter trie nga 4 58 Front Panel Operation 4 Introduction Introduction This chapter provides instructions to operate the 5730A Calibrator from the front panel and how to set up the Calibrator Remote interface setups are explained in Chapter 5 Descriptions and instructions to program offsets scale factors and linearity checks are also provided Before the procedures in this chapter are started become familiar with the front panel controls displays and terminals that are identified and described in Chapter 3 Once familiar with the front panel be sure to warm up the Calibrator in accordance with the instructions in the Warmup section Also run the dc zeros process as explained in the Run DC Zeros section of Chapter 7 For information on remote commands used to operate the Calibrator refer to Chapter 6 AAWarning The Product is capable of supplying lethal voltages Do not make connections to the output terminals when any voltage is present Placing the Product in standby may not be enough to prevent shock hazard since the key could be pushed accidentally Push and verify that standby is illuminated before making connections to the output terminals Turn on the Calibrator AAWarning To avoid electric shock make sure the Pr
250. th for common mode noise and ground loop currents The voltage guard is usually internally connected to the OUTPUT LO terminal This is the normal power up state of the Calibrator and the connection is automatically made when the external guard is not selected This is the state when the External Guard selection says OFF If calibrating a UUT with a grounded low or common input terminal an external connection to the V GUARD is necessary The Calibrator voltage guard must be grounded at the UUT Note To prevent ground loops there must be only one ground connection in the system so all ground connections should be made at the UUT To maintain one ground point make sure the grounding strap between the GUARD and GROUND binding posts is disconnected See Table 3 1 items 17 and 18 Four Wire Vs Two Wire Resistance Connections Figure 4 4 shows four different ways to connect to a UUT for resistance calibration Figure 4 4A shows a UUT with four wire sensing For such meters always take advantage of the four wire sensing capability and use external sensing to get the highest accuracy Four wire sensing is available for all resistance values except 100 MQ For calibrating a meter with only a two wire resistance mode such as a typical handheld DMM refer to Figures 4 4B through 4 4D For resistances of 19 KQ or lower in two wire mode compensation circuitry inside the 5730A Calibrator is available to remove errors introduced by resistance in t
251. the 5730A Calibrator To increment or decrement a higher order digit push Ell As the reference value is approached work progressively back towards the least significant digit on the Calibrator display as necessary by pushing 3 It is only necessary to go one digit past the least significant digit of the UUT Digits below that are beyond the resolution of the UUT The UUT error is shown on the display This example assumes that the Calibrator is in the dc voltage function 3 14 13 10 52am 4 3 ppm 1 year 213 days since calibration Standby 9 999998 v Reference Error 10 000000V 0 20 ppm hhp132 eps 4 35 5730A Operators Manual Read the UUT Error Resistance Output To read the error of the UUT in the resistance function 1 Set the necessary resistance output as described under Set the Output 2 Use the output adjustment controls as necessary to achieve a reading on the display illustrated below equal to the reading on the UUT To adjust a higher order digit push Ell As the reference value is approached work progressively back towards the least significant digit on the 5730A Calibrator display as necessary by pushing J It is only necessary to go one digit past the least significant digit of the UUT 3 15 2013 10 52am 10 0 ppm 1 year 213 days since calibration Standby 1 9000096 o Reading Error 1 9000706 5 79ppm hhp133 eps Introduction to Offset Scale and Linearity Errors
252. the Calibrator 4 Touchscreen selections with several possible values look like the Calibration Interval item shown in the screen above Touch the selection to open another menu with a selection for each possible choice as shown below Instrument Uncertainty Setup Information Calibration Interval 90 Days 180 Days 1 Year Touch a value to select it or touch Cancel to abort the value change hhp152 eps Touchscreen selections with many possible values look like the Port selection in the Ethernet Setup menu shown here Ethernet Setup DHCP IP Address Gateway Static IP Settings MAC Address IP Address 129 196 136 119 Port 129 196 136 119 129 196 136 001 00 80 40 00 32 90 Subnet 255 255 254 000 Remote IF hhp153 eps To change the value touch the present value and then enter a new value with the numeric keypad 4 51 5730A Operators Manual 4 52 Some of the setup menus have a Restore Factory Defaults selection If this selection is touched a confirmation is requested Touch Restore to reset the Calibrator to factory defaults or Cancel to make no changes Instrument Setup The Instrument Setup menu accessed by touching the Instrument Setup selection in the Setup Menu is shown on this screen Instrument Setup Active Remote Port RS 232 Change Current Limits GPIB Setup Change Voltage Limits RS 232 Setup Ethernet Setup USB Setup Calibration Inte
253. the Calibrator will prompt to do so before the results are saved Touch Discard to discard the results from the calibration Range Adjustment Once calibration is complete it may be necessary to make further adjustments to the range Range adjustment is accomplished by adjusting a range constant which is an additional gain multiplier Although range calibration is not needed in order to meet total uncertainty specifications they are useful for tuning the 5730A Calibrator so that its values are closer to in house standards Use an in house laboratory standard to adjust the range constants The subsequent procedure for adjusting the range constants is designed for laboratory standard values that are between 45 and 95 of the range s full scale value Once the range constant is adjusted the new constant remains active until the next calibration at which time all range constant multipliers are restored to 1 All range adjustments can be erased by calling up the format non volatile memory menu and selecting Range Constants see Chapter 4 Before the subsequent procedure is started make sure the equipment necessary including in house laboratory standards where necessary are on hand The subsequent example procedure adjusts the 220 V dc range constant with the listed equipment e 732B DC reference standard e 752A Reference Divider e Null Detector Fluke Calibration 8508A 8 5 Digit Reference Multimeter e Low Thermal Test Leads 5440A
254. the error of the Calibrator itself when its performance is verified against a more accurate measuring device The true value method of error calculation uses the formula Reference value edit value edit value With either the nominal or true value method small changes in output value result in a calculated error that is the same In the example above the display will show the error as 30 0 ppm The true value method is useful for large changes in output value For example if 10 0000 V is applied to an analog meter and then the Calibrator output is adjusted to 11 0000 V so that the analog meter now reads exactly 10 V the true value method will show nominal 10 0000 V rel err 9 0909 9 0909 represents the relative error of the analog meter when compared to the true value 11 0000 V in this case To select the UUT error calculation method 1 Touch Setup gt Instrument Setup 2 Touch Error Reference until it shows the desired choice The choices are Nominal Value or True Value Front Panel Operation 4 Instrument Settings Instrument Settings Set the Internal Clock Calendar An internal clock calendar provides the date corrected for leap years and time to the Calibrator CPU Central Processing Unit The clock setting should be checked and set if necessary Note A long life lithium battery keeps the clock calendar running during power off periods If the battery in the Calibrator should ever
255. thermal EMF performance However some UUTs have repressed banana connectors that cannot accommodate spade lugs Front Panel Operation Connect the Calibrator to a UUT When to Use External Sensing External sensing is normally necessary only when calibrating a device that draws enough current to produce a significant voltage drop in the cables An example of such a case is with the use of the Calibrator as an external dc voltage reference for an ac dc transfer standard In this example the Calibrator is sourcing 1 V dc into a Fluke 540B AC DC Transfer Standard The 180 Q input impedance results in a current flow of approximately 5 mA The Calibrator 90 day uncertainty at 1 V is specified to be 6 ppm 1 2 uV or 7 2 uV Cumulative lead and contact resistances of as little as 2 mQ would cause a voltage drop greater than the total uncertainty of the Calibrator External sensing eliminates this error The normal power up state of the Calibrator is external sensing off with an internal connection between the SENSE and OUTPUT automatically made This is the state when the External Sense selection says OFF When to Use the External Voltage Guard The voltage guard protects the analog circuitry by placing an electrical shield between the primary and secondary of the ac line power transformer An optical cable transmits control information from the 5730A Calibrator microprocessor to analog circuits The voltage guard provides a low impedance pa
256. tion 1 Float UUT error magnitude 2 String units for the above number PPM PCT or DB Overlapped command ignored if not in remote Sets the phase output signal to lead or lag the main output signal by up to 180 degrees Phase in degrees 359 to 359 fractions ignored 6 39 5730A Operators Manual Table 6 5 Commands cont PHASE Sequential command Description Returns the phase angle of the variable phase output signal with respect to the main output signal Integer Phase in degrees 0 to 180 179 to O 0 if the output is not ac PHASELCK Overlapped command ignored if not in remote Description Enables or disables external phase locking when the Calibrator is supplying an ac ON Activates phase lockin OFF debe phase t PHASESFT Overlapped command ignored if not in remote Description Enables or disables the variable phase output when the Calibrator is supplying an ac ON Activates variable phase output OFF Deactivates variable phase output POST 52120 Rena command Ignored if not in remote Sets the output terminals for all attached S 1 LO52120 HI52120 POST 52120 LO52120 Example ix Selects the low current output terminals for all attached 52120As POST 52120 Sequential command Returns the selected output terminals for all attached 52120As POST 52120 Example Returns HI52120 if the high current output terminals are selected for all attached 52120As 6 40 Remote Comman
257. tion Increment step size positive for incremental step negative for decremental step Units Parameter E F 3 optional specify magnitude or frequency E INCR 00001 Enters error mode and decrements the output by 00001 xample P INCR 1 Hz Enters error mode and increments the frequency by 1 Hz IPADDR Description Sequential command Ignored if not in remote Sets IP address for LAN communication P when NOT in DHCP mode and with static IP addressing IP address quoted string consisting of 4 decimal values bound between 0 255 separated Parameter A by periods IP 129 196 136 119 Example Sets the Ethernet IP static address to 129 196 136 119 IPADDR Sequential command Returns IP address for LAN communication When DHCP is Description enabled this address will be the address allocated by the DNS server When DHCP is disabled this address will be the entered value of the static IP address IPADDR Example May return 129 196 137 45 if DHCP is enabled and the DNS server has allocated the device this address or 129 196 136 119 and DHCP is disabled and the static address has been previously set to this address 6 34 Remote Commands and Syntax 6 Commands Table 6 5 Commands cont ISCE Sequential command Description Loads a byte into the Instrument Status Change Enable register described under Check the Calibrator Status The decimal equivalent of the binary number to load into the register ISCE 56 Enables bi
258. tion 5700A 03 proceed from GEES or the power up state as follows 1 Make sure the Calibrator is in standby STANDBY annunciator lit Push if necessary 2 Ifthe UUT is not connected connect it now as described previously in this chapter under Connect the Calibrator to a UUT Set the UUT to read ac voltage on the appropriate range 4 Touch Wideband With the numeric keypad enter the necessary output amplitude expressed as voltage or a dBm level Note In the Wideband AC function dBm means decibels relative to 1 mW calculated for a 50 Qload The formula to calculate dBm is 10 log power in mW For example if 3 0 V is supplied to a 50 Q load the dBm level is 10 log 180 0 mW 22 5527 dBm If the Calibrator is switched to standard ac output but dBm is kept as the displayed units the dBm value changes The value changes because dBm is calculated for a 600 2 load in the standard ac output function With the same voltage level as in the previous example if the Calibrator is switched to standard ac output the dBm level changes to 10 log 15 0 mW 11 7609 dBm 6 To enter a negative dBm value push 7 Push or Kill if necessary 8 Push for volts or J for volts expressed as dBm 4 27 5730A Operators Manual 9 The display now shows the amplitude of the entry If an entry error is made push to clear the display then reenter the value If the most recent digit entered is in error push ij to cle
259. tion check String lt EOL gt lt range name gt lt points gt lt EOL gt lt mag 1 gt lt freq 1 gt lt offset 1 gt lt ashift 1 gt lt rshift 1 gt lt sshift 1 gt lt spec 1 gt lt EOL gt lt mag n gt lt freq n gt lt offset n gt lt ashift n gt lt rshift 1 gt lt sshift n gt lt spec n gt lt EOL gt Where range name gt Range identifier from Table 5 4 Response it points Integer Number of points for the range magn Float Magnitude for point n in range units freq n Float Frequency for point n in Hz offset n gt Float Zero shift for point n in range units ashift n gt Float Absolute shift for point n in range units rshift n gt Float Relative shift for point n ppm lt sshift n gt Float of spec shift for point n lt specn gt Calibrator specification for point n in ppm Range units are the appropriate units for the range for example for all DC V ranges range units are V CAL SLST CAL could return 49 DC220MV 2 Example 2 20E 1 0 00E 00 1 76E 07 1 97E 07 8 98E 01 7 10E 00 1 26E 01 2 20E 1 0 00E 00 1 58E 07 1 38E 07 6 26E 01 4 95E 00 1 26E 01 DC2_2V 2 cont CAL_STORE Sequential command ignored if not in remote Stores all new calibration constants in nonvolatile memory Use this command to save the results of a CAL ADJ command after completely finished with calibration via remote control The Calibrator secure state must be set to off or an exe
260. tion sticker or the standard 6 If the entered value is not between 9 V and 11 V an error message is shown The process can be started over from this point with a calibrated 732B Push HEME to start the calibration procedure As the 5730A Calibrator does self calibration it will indicate what is happening on the display When the 6 5 V and 13 V references have been characterized the display prompts the user to accept or reject the changes that are about to be made to the calibration constants 7 To reject the changes touch Cancel Otherwise touch Continue to accept and save the changes and to continue with calibration 8 Reverse the HI and LO connections at the 732B terminals and push Continue to continue the calibration process 9 After this part of the calibration procedure is complete the Calibrator shows the reference shifts and prompts to continue Touch Continue See the manual for the correct connections as prompted by the Calibrator and enter the first calibration value 10 Connect the Calibrator to the 10 kQ standard as shown in Figure 7 5 and enter the true value of the standard If the standard is not between 9 kQ and 11 kQ an error message is shown Start over from this point with a different standard Push again to continue 11 When the internal 10 kQ reference has been characterized accept or reject the changes that are about to be made to the calibration constant To reject the changes touch Cancel Oth
261. tions Warm Up Time seen System Installation Standard Interfaces Temperature Performance Operating CalibratiOn 5 inier eee aree nns Storage Relative Humidity Operating Storage Electromagnetic Environment Line Power Line Frequency Maximum Power Twice the time since last warmed up to a maximum of 30 minutes Rack mount kits available IEEE 488 RS 232 USB 2 0 device Ethernet 5725A 52120A phase lock in BNC phase reference out BNC 0 C to 50 C 15 C to 35 C 40 C to 75 C lt 80 to 30 C lt 70 to 40 C lt 40 to 50 C lt 95 non condensing A power stabilization period of four days may be required after extended storage at high temperature and humidity IEC 61010 1 300V CATII Pollution Degree 2 2000 m maximum 20V IEC 61326 1 Controlled 47 Hz to 63 Hz 10 100 V 110 V 115 V 120 V 200 V 220 V 230 V 240 V 300 VA 27 kg 62 Ib 32 kg 70 Ib 17 8 cm 7 in standard rack increment plus 1 5 cm 0 6 in for feet 43 2 cm 17 in standard rack width 64 8 cm 25 5 in overall 59 4 cm 23 4 in rack depth 13 3 cm 5 25 in Both units project 5 1 cm 2 in from rack front 5730A Operators Manual L 43 2 cm 17 in gt 17 8 cm 7 in 6 35 cm 2 5 in lt A ADN cm For cable access 64 8 cm 25 5 in hhp002 eps Figu
262. tor computes and shows the difference between the adjusted output and the reference level in or ppm parts per million The reference level is the original output setting before it was adjusted When this capability is used to adjust the output until the UUT reads correctly the displayed difference is the UUT error for that output setting The error is shown in unless it is 20 ppm or less For example if the Calibrator is set to output 10 00000 V and the UUT reads high To determine the error use the output adjustment controls to adjust the Calibrator until the UUT reads 10 0000 V If for example the Calibrator display now reads 9 993900 the Calibrator calculates and shows a UUT error of 0 0610 on the display The Calibrator uses this formula to calculate the UUT error Reference Final Output Error X 100 Reference The rotary knob is also a convenient way to change the frequency during ac voltage tests To adjust frequency in error mode for example when meter flatness is tested push EH The 10 Hz digit of the frequency line is highlighted Push Ell twice When the knob is turned the output frequency increases or decreases 1 kHz per knob click 4 33 5730A Operators Manual Error Mode Overview This section explains how to use Error Mode in general After the overview a step by step procedure explains how to use this mode to read UUT error for each Calibrator output function Enter Error Mode T
263. tors Manual Input Buffer Operation 4 ed deed ede eei tb dee eh 6 5 Commands tercii ee eee P RR e ER tee C eee Rc DEP ee e REC rete 6 6 Multiple Commands e Rt de ed ee e Rd eee die eod 6 6 Coupled Commands rhet porre ere nep gut 6 6 Sequential and Overlapped Commandis sse 6 7 Commands Ignored When Not in Remote see 6 7 Commands that Require the Calibration Security Passcode 6 7 Long Term Comimands 1n eh det et ete tere obere iere 6 7 Definition Queries and Commands essere 6 8 Functional Elements of Commands essere 6 8 Interface Messages IEEE 488 Only eene 6 10 Use of OPC TOPCO and WAL e rte rettet tiere treten 6 12 Local to Remote State Transitions cccccceesseceeeeeeseeceeaceceeeeeeeaeeeeaeceeaeeeeaees 6 50 Check the Calibrator Status eed ree niet iret ertet not eet eee erai ae te 6 52 Serial Poll Status Byte ete dene eene anrea 6 54 Service Request Line SRQ essent 6 54 Service Request Enable Register cece ceeceseceseceeeeeeeeeeneeeaeeeaeeeeeeaaes 6 54 Load the SRE ies teet ter ete vasa sai cuasteses tui astovesbacenevenesidvessccoes 6 54 Event Status Register ete Ee eiie a bade ene eee ao 6 55 Bit Assignments for the ESR and ESE eee 6 55 Read th ESR and BSE urere reete iret 6 56 oad the ESE LL 6 56 Instru
264. try limits that are set prevent any input greater than the limit from being activated by entry through the front panel keys or the output adjustment controls Positive limits for voltage and current set the limits for ac voltage and current Default entry limits after power up or J is pushed are the specified maximum and minimum for each output function Note The output limits are not saved when the Calibrator is powered down To set voltage and current entry limits 1 Touch Setup Menu gt Instrument Setup gt Output Limits This menu is shown Voltage Current es Ce hhp143 eps 2 There is a selection for each of the four limits maximum positive voltage and current and negative voltage and current Select the limit to change by touching the corresponding selection 3 Use the numeric keys to enter the necessary voltage limit and B E3 or ES if necessary followed by EENES Note The upper voltage limit sets the limits for both dc and ac voltage The upper current limit sets the limits for both dc and ac current 4 54 Front Panel Operation 4 Instrument Setup Select Boost Amplifiers If an auxiliary amplifier other than the 5725A will be used one amplifier can be identified for current boost and one amplifier can be identified for voltage boost Model 5725A is the factory default for both voltage and current boost To select other amplifiers 1 Touch Setup Menu gt Instrument Setup gt Boost Amp Types If
265. ts 3 BOOST 4 RCOMP and 5 RLOCK in the Service Request Enable register ISCE Sequential command Description Returns the byte from the Instrument Status Change Enable register described under Check the Calibrator Status The decimal equivalent of the register contents byte ISCE Example Returns 4 if bit 3 BOOST is enabled 1 and the rest of the bits are disabled 0 See Check the Calibrator Status for details ISCR Sequential command Description Returns and clears the byte from the Instrument Status Change Register described under Check the Calibrator Status The decimal equivalent of the register contents byte ISCR Example Returns 8 if bit 3 BOOST is set 1 and the rest of the bits are reset 0 See Check the Calibrator Status for details ISR Sequential command Description Returns and clears the byte from the Instrument Status Register described under Check the Calibrator Status The decimal equivalent of the register contents byte ISR Example Returns 16 if bit 4 RLOCK is set 1 and the rest of the bits are reset 0 See Check the Calibrator Status for details LCOMP_52120 Besdrton Overlapped command Ignored if not in remote Sets inductance compensation for i attached 52120As ON enables LCOMP for all attached 52120s Parameter OFF disables LCOMP for all attached 52120s 6 35 5730A Operators Manual Table 6 5 Commands cont LCOMP_52
266. ual Introduction This chapter explains how to do the routine maintenance and calibration tasks necessary to keep the 5730A Calibrator in optimal operating condition For intensive maintenance tasks such as troubleshooting or repair contact a Fluke Calibration Service Center See How to Contact Fluke Calibration in Chapter 1 Fuse Replacement Access the fuse from the rear panel The fuse rating label below the fuse holder shows the correct replacement fuse ratings for each operating voltage AAWartning To prevent possible electrical shock fire or personal injury e Turn the Product off and remove the mains power cord Stop for two minutes to let the power assemblies discharge before you open the fuse door e Replace a blown fuse with exact replacement only for continued protection against arc flash e Use only specified replacement fuses see Table 7 1 To access the fuse refer to Figure 7 1 Disconnect the mains power cord With a standard screwdriver release the fuse holder door Pull out the fuse holder If necessary replace the fuse Reinsert the fuse holder OY lt r dm GS or Close the fuse holder door Table 7 1 Replacement Fuses Line Voltage Range Fuse Description Fluke Part Number A 100 V 120 V T3A250V 109280 A 220 V 240 V T 1 5 A 250 V 109231 7 2 Operator Maintenance and Calibration Fuse Replacement Figure 7 1 Access the Fuse hhp003 eps 7 3 5730A Ope
267. unless operating more than 5 C from calibration temperature 2 For larger resistive loads multiply accuracy specifications by actual load maximum load for full accuracy 1 5 V compliance limit above 1 A 5725A Amplifier may be used in range lock mode down to 1 A For resistive loads within rated compliance voltage limits Minimum Output 9 uA for 220 uA range 10 on all other ranges 1 A minimum for 5725A PURER AA EAA 400 uH 5730A or 5725A 20 uH for 5730A output gt 1 A 5730A 0 9 to 1 5725A 0 1 to 1 Subject to compliance voltage Inductive Load Limits Power Factors limits Frequency Range Hz treten eren 10 000 11 999 12 00 119 99 120 0 1199 9 1 200 k 10 000 k ACCUFBOV 1 ire ne tte trot trn e ERE TER dena ad 0 01 of output Resolution eene 11 999 counts Settling Time sseeeees 5 seconds for 5730A ranges 6 seconds for 5725A 11 A range 1 second for amplitude or frequency range change Overshoot nei cre toe 10 96 1 31 5730A Operators Manual Wideband AC Voltage Option 5700 03 Specifications Specifications apply to the end of the cable and 50 Q termination used for calibration Absolute Accuracy 5 C from calibration temperature Resolution 30 Hz 500 kHz 24 Hours 0 4 0 4 0 5 0 4 0 6 0 4 0 8 2 0 4 1 0 45 1 0 541 0 7 3 0 2 4 0 35 4 0 5 4 0 7 8 0 2 10 0 3 10 0 45 10 0 6 16 0 2 40 0 3 40
268. up Menu In addition the Phase Control and Scale functions are available The output range is always automatically chosen and cannot be locked in ac volts Note The Calibrator stays in the ac function after a non zero frequency is entered To change back to dc enter a frequency of 0 Hz or a signed voltage 4 19 5730A Operators Manual 4 20 DC Current Output To set a dc current output 1 9o 10 m 2 9 10 Make sure the Calibrator is in standby STANDBY annunciator lit Push if necessary If the UUT is not connected connect it now as described earlier in this chapter under Connect the Calibrator to a UUT Set the UUT to measure dc current in the appropriate range Enter a current value with the numeric keypad To change the polarity of the entry push Push or Kill if necessary Push Ey The display now shows the amplitude of the entry If an entry error is made push to clear the display then reenter the value If the most recent digit entered is in error push Qto clear that digit The illustration of the display below assumes an entry of 30 mA 3 14 2013 10 52am 0 00050mV 1 year 213 days since calibration Standby 0 00000 mv Push EMES The Calibrator clears the entry from the entry bar toward the bottom and shows in the larger area above No current is available at the output terminals until is pushed Push to activate the Calibrator output The UUT will now respond to the ap
269. valid 4704 Ethernet hostname not valid 4705 Ethernet hostname too long 4706 Cannot get DHCP IP address 4707 ENET Port 1 4708 ENET Remote Interface 4709 Port value already in use 4710 Cannot Change Ethernet Settings Now 4800 Level Faults GPIB 4800 Error opening GPIB Controller 4801 Error setting GPIB Primary Address 4802 Error occurred reading characters from GPIB controller 4803 Error occurred sending characters to the GPIB controller 4804 GPIB DOS Error 4805 GPIB Specified Interface Board is not Active Controller 4806 GPIB No present listening devices 4807 GPIB Interface Board has not been addressed properly 4808 GPIB Invalid argument 4809 GPIB Specified Interface Board is not System Controller 4810 GPIB I O operation aborted time out 4811 GPIB Non existent GPIB board 4812 GPIB Routine not allowed during asynchronous I O operation 4813 GPIB No capability for operation Appendices Fault Codes A 4814 GPIB File System Error 4815 GPIB Command byte transfer error 4816 GPIB Serial poll status byte lost 4817 GPIB SRQ stuck in ON position 4818 GPIB Table problem 4900 Level Faults USB Host 4900 Failed to mount USB drive 4901 Failed to copy files 5000 Level Faults 52120A Boost System 5000 Error while reading 52120A cal store 5001 Expected a 52120A but it was gone 5002 52120A cal store corrupted 5003 Value out of range of 52120A 5004 Unknown error reported by
270. y connected to the grounded UUT input Binding Post External Guard on The maximum allowable potential between the V GUARD connector and chassis ground is 20 V peak Refer to When to use the External Voltage Guard and Cable Connection Instructions in Chapter 4 for details The WIDEBAND connector is a Type N connector that provides a connection point for output from the Option 5700A 03 Wideband AC Module Wideband output specifications are stated for output levels present at the end of its 3 foot 50 Q WIDEBAND coaxial cable terminated into a 50 Q purely resistive load The connector shell is Connector connected to chassis ground Refer to Chapter 4 for connecting and operating instructions for the wideband module 5730A Operators Manual Table 3 1 Front Panel Features cont ptm Description o Connection points for ac and dc current and voltage output and resistance The function of each OUTPUT binding post is defined below LO The common binding post for all output functions including 5725A amplified voltage output but not Option 5700A 03 Wideband AC or other auxiliary amplifier output HI OUTPUT The active binding post for all output functions including 5725A amplified voltage Binding Posts output but not Option 5700A 03 Wideband AC or other auxiliary amplifier output AUX CURRENT OUTPUT An optional active binding post for current It is convenient to use the AUX CURRENT OUTPUT binding post when calibrating a
271. z ee e MV is interpreted as millivolts ee e MAV is interpreted as megavolts ee e MA is interpreted as milliamperes Extra Space Characters Tables 6 5 and 6 6 and the remote program examples at the end of this chapter show commands and their parameters separated by spaces One space after a command is necessary All other spaces are optional They are shown for clarity in the manual and may be left in or omitted as desired Extra spaces can be inserted between parameters as desired Extra spaces within a parameter are generally not allowed except for between a number and its associated multiplier or unit Example Explanation OUT 188 3 MA 442 HZ Equivalent to OUT 188 3MA 442HZ OUT 110 041 V Invalid no space allowed in a number OUT 110 041 V Correct form for above Table 6 5 contains examples for commands whose parameters are not self explanatory Terminators To signal the end of a response sent to the controller the 5730A Calibrator sends a terminator For response message terminators the Calibrator sends the ASCII character Line Feed with the EOI control line held high The subsequent characters are recognized by the Calibrator as terminators when encountered in incoming data e ASCII LF character e Any ASCII character sent with the EOI control line true Incoming Character Processing The 5730A Calibrator processes all incoming data as follows except the 8 bit data byte portion of the PU

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

PD130 User Manual - FindTheNeedle.co.uk  Rexel ID Folder  SMART - Universität zu Köln  BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG  オリティー    

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file